WO2018127025A1 - 寻呼信息的传输方法、装置及系统 - Google Patents

寻呼信息的传输方法、装置及系统 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018127025A1
WO2018127025A1 PCT/CN2017/120330 CN2017120330W WO2018127025A1 WO 2018127025 A1 WO2018127025 A1 WO 2018127025A1 CN 2017120330 W CN2017120330 W CN 2017120330W WO 2018127025 A1 WO2018127025 A1 WO 2018127025A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
communication node
paging
information
paging information
signal
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2017/120330
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
刘星
毕峰
李儒岳
郝鹏
Original Assignee
中兴通讯股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 中兴通讯股份有限公司 filed Critical 中兴通讯股份有限公司
Priority to EP17889644.5A priority Critical patent/EP3567942B1/en
Publication of WO2018127025A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018127025A1/zh
Priority to US16/459,922 priority patent/US11576147B2/en
Priority to US17/830,919 priority patent/US11997645B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/02—Arrangements for increasing efficiency of notification or paging channel
    • H04W68/025—Indirect paging
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/02—Arrangements for increasing efficiency of notification or paging channel
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/04—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like multi-step notification using statistical or historical mobility data
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0617—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal for beam forming
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00—Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/24—Cell structures
    • H04W16/28—Cell structures using beam steering
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/27—Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/28—Discontinuous transmission [DTX]; Discontinuous reception [DRX]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W92/00—Interfaces specially adapted for wireless communication networks
    • H04W92/16—Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices
    • H04W92/20—Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices between access points

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to the field of wireless communication technologies, for example, to a method, device, and system for transmitting paging information.
  • the new generation of wireless communication communication will be carried out using a carrier frequency higher than that of the 4th Generation Mobile Communication (4G) system, such as 28 GHz, 45 GHz or 70 GHz, etc.
  • the high-frequency channel has the disadvantages of large free propagation loss, easy to be absorbed by oxygen, and greatly affected by rain attenuation, which seriously affects the coverage performance of the high-frequency communication system.
  • the carrier frequency corresponding to the high-frequency communication has a shorter wavelength, it is possible to ensure that more antenna elements can be accommodated per unit area, and more antenna elements mean that beamforming can be used to improve the antenna gain. Thereby ensuring the coverage performance of high frequency communication.
  • the transmitting end can concentrate the transmitting energy in one direction, while the other directions have little or no energy, that is, each beam has its own directivity, and each beam can only cover To a terminal in a certain direction, the transmitting end (such as a base station) needs to transmit multiple beams to complete the full coverage.
  • the transmitting end (such as a base station) needs to transmit multiple beams to complete the full coverage.
  • the application of beamforming technology limits the coverage of a single transmitting port to a small angle. At this time, the network side will not be able to know the idle (IDLE).
  • the base station transmits paging information in different beam directions or ports by means of time division multiplexing. In the beam transmission based system, the beam directions of different subframes or time slots are based on flexible service configuration. .
  • paging information needs to be loaded in a transmission subframe or time slot corresponding to each beam, which means that the UE transmits on different beams.
  • the paging information reception will be dispersed in multiple subframes or time slots in the paging cycle. Since the UE in the IDLE state cannot predict the scheduling of the beam or port in different time slots, in the new generation wireless communication system, the correlation is adopted.
  • the mechanism for transmitting paging information through the discontinuous reception (DRX) mechanism in the LTE system to save energy is complicated or even difficult to implement.
  • the present disclosure provides a method, an apparatus, and a system for transmitting paging information, so as to at least solve the problem that when a manner of receiving paging information through a DRX mechanism in a related LTE system is applied to a new generation wireless communication system, it is required to correspond to each beam.
  • the paging information is loaded in the transmission subframe or the time slot, and the UE in the IDLE state cannot predict the scheduling of the beam or the port in different time slots, and the manner of transmitting the paging information through the DRX mechanism is very complicated and difficult to implement. .
  • the present disclosure provides a method for transmitting paging information, including:
  • the first communication node calculates a time domain location of a paging moment (Paging Occasion, PO) of the second communication node;
  • the first communication node sends paging information to the second communication node in the PO corresponding to the time domain location, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information, paging message;
  • the PO includes a group of paging resources, and the group of paging resources is used for transmission of one or more preset beam or port paging information.
  • the disclosure also provides a method for transmitting a paging message, including:
  • the second communication node calculates a time domain location of the paging occasion PO of the second communication node
  • the second communication node receives the paging information sent by the first communication node in the PO corresponding to the time domain location, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information and paging message;
  • the PO includes a group of paging resources, and the group of paging resources is used for transmission of one or more preset beam or port paging information.
  • the disclosure also provides a method for transmitting paging information, including:
  • the first communication node sends indication information to the second communication node, where the indication information is quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scan signals or channels; or the first communication node and the first The second communication node configures quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels;
  • the first communication node sends paging information to the second communications node according to the quasi-common position relationship information, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information and paging message.
  • the disclosure also provides a method for transmitting paging information, including:
  • the second communication node receives the first communication node sending indication information, where the indication information is quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels; or the second communication node and the first a communication node configuring quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels;
  • the second communication node receives the paging information sent by the first communications node according to the quasi-common position relationship information, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information and paging message.
  • the present disclosure further provides a transmission device for paging information, which is disposed in a first communication node, and the device includes:
  • a calculation module configured to calculate a time domain location of a paging occasion PO of the second communication node
  • a sending module configured to send paging information to the second communications node in a PO corresponding to the time domain location calculated by the calculating module, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control Information and paging messages;
  • the PO includes a group of paging resources, and the group of paging resources is used for transmission of one or more preset beam or port paging information.
  • the present disclosure also provides a transmission device for paging messages, which is disposed in a second communication node, and the device includes:
  • a calculation module configured to calculate a time domain location of a paging occasion PO of the second communication node
  • the receiving module is configured to receive paging information sent by the first communications node in the PO corresponding to the time domain location calculated by the calculating module, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control Information and paging messages;
  • the PO includes a group of paging resources, and the group of paging resources is used for transmission of one or more preset beam or port paging information.
  • the present disclosure further provides a transmission device for paging information, which is disposed in a first communication node, where the device includes: a sending module and a configuration module;
  • the sending module is configured to send indication information to the second communication node, where the indication information is quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels; or the configuration module is set to And configuring quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and the other scanning signals or channels in the first communication node;
  • the sending module is further configured to send paging information to the second communications node according to the quasi-common position relationship information, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information and paging message .
  • the present disclosure further provides a transmission device for paging information, which is disposed in a second communication node, where the device includes: a receiving module and a configuration module;
  • the receiving module is configured to receive, by the first communications node, the indication information, where the indication information is quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels; or the configuration module is configured to And configuring quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and the other scanning signals or channels in the second communication node;
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive, according to the quasi-common position relationship information, paging information sent by the first communications node, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information and paging Message.
  • the present disclosure also provides a transmission system for paging information, including: a first communication node and at least one second communication node;
  • the transmission device configured with the corresponding paging information in the first communication node, and the transmission device configured with the corresponding paging information in each of the second communication nodes;
  • the first communication node is configured with the transmission device of the corresponding paging information
  • each of the second communication nodes is configured with the transmission device of the corresponding paging information.
  • the present disclosure also provides a computer readable storage medium storing computer executable instructions for performing any of the methods described above.
  • the present disclosure also provides a base station including one or more processors, a memory, and one or more programs, the one or more programs being stored in a memory, when executed by one or more processors, executing The corresponding method described above.
  • the present disclosure also provides a terminal device including one or more processors, a memory, and one or more programs, the one or more programs being stored in a memory when executed by one or more processors , execute the corresponding method above.
  • the present disclosure also provides a computer program product comprising a computer program stored on a non-transitory computer readable storage medium, the computer program comprising program instructions, when the program instructions are executed by a computer, Having the computer perform any of the methods described above.
  • the method, device and system for transmitting paging information can solve the problem that a method for receiving paging information through a DRX mechanism in a related LTE system is applied to a new generation wireless communication system, and a corresponding transmission sub-beam is required.
  • the paging information is loaded in a frame or a time slot, and because the UE in the IDLE state cannot predict the scheduling of the beam or the port in different time slots, the manner of transmitting the paging information by the DRX mechanism is very complicated and difficult to implement.
  • FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a method for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a synchronization signal window group in a method for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of another method for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a paging information transmission apparatus according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of another apparatus for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of still another method for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of still another method for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of still another paging information transmission apparatus according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of still another apparatus for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of still another method for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of another apparatus for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of still another method for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of another apparatus for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a transmission system for paging information according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a T DRX in a method for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment
  • 16 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T DRX and T paging according to an embodiment 1;
  • 17 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T paging and T SS provided in a sub-implementation example 1-1;
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of a PO of a terminal in the sub-implementation example 1-1 shown in FIG. 17;
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T paging and T SS provided in a sub-implementation example 1-2;
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T paging and T SS provided in a sub-implementation example 1-3;
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a PO of a terminal in the sub-implementation examples 1-3 shown in FIG. 20;
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T paging and T SS provided in a sub-implementation example 1-4;
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a PO of the terminal in the sub-implementation examples 1-4 shown in FIG. 22;
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of another PO of the terminal in the sub-implementation examples 1-4 shown in FIG. 22;
  • 25 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T paging and T DRX according to an implementation example 2;
  • 26 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T paging and T DRX according to an implementation example 3;
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T paging and T SS provided in a sub-implementation example 5-1;
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T paging and T SS provided in a sub-implementation example 5-2;
  • 29 is a schematic diagram showing another relationship between T paging and T SS provided in a sub-implementation example 5-2;
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram showing still another relationship between T paging and T SS provided by a sub-implementation example 5-2;
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T paging and T SS according to an embodiment 6;
  • FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T paging and T SS according to an embodiment 9;
  • FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T paging and T SS provided by a sub-implementation example 9-2;
  • FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T paging and T SS provided by a sub-implementation example 9-3;
  • 35 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between T paging and T SS provided by a sub-implementation example 9-4;
  • FIG. 36 is a schematic structural diagram of a PO of a terminal in Embodiment 10.
  • 40 is a schematic structural diagram of hardware of a base station according to an embodiment
  • FIG. 41 is a schematic structural diagram of hardware of a terminal device according to an embodiment.
  • the manner in which the base station transmits the paging information is briefly described.
  • the measurement and identification of the initial beam direction are performed in the process of the UE accessing the network, and the preferred uplink and downlink transmission and reception beams are determined and applied in subsequent uplink and downlink data communication.
  • the UE accessing the network enters the idle (IDLE) state when no service needs to be transmitted.
  • the UE in the IDLE state needs to monitor the paging information to detect whether there is a paging information field for the UE on the core network side.
  • the information domain includes, for example, downlink data arrival indication, system message change, receiving Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System (EWTS) information, and receiving Commercial Mobile Alert Service (CMAS) information.
  • EWTS Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System
  • CMAS Commercial Mobile Alert Service
  • the terminal demodulation control channel acquires whether there is paging information on the current network side, and determines, on the data channel, whether the network side wants to page the local UE and the paging according to the paging scheduling information. What is the reason, and perform the corresponding follow-up operations according to the paging reason.
  • the application of beamforming technology limits the coverage of a single transmitting port to a small angle.
  • the network side will not be able to know the idle (IDLE).
  • IDLE idle
  • the paging information of the full beam needs to be repeatedly transmitted, that is, the network side needs More paging information is transmitted to ensure that the UE under each beam direction or port has the opportunity to receive the specified paging information.
  • the base station needs to transmit paging information in different beam directions or ports by means of time division multiplexing.
  • the beam directions of different subframes or time slots are based on flexible service configuration. of. If the paging mechanism of the LTE system is adopted, paging information needs to be loaded in the transmission subframe or time slot corresponding to each beam, which means that the paging information received by the UE for different beams will be dispersed into the paging cycle.
  • the paging information is transmitted by the DRX mechanism in the LTE system to save energy.
  • the mechanism has become complicated and even difficult to achieve.
  • the entity that is executed in the following embodiments in the following embodiments includes a first communication node and a second communication node.
  • the first communication node may be a base station in a new generation wireless communication system, and may include: A base station (BS), an evolved Node B (eNB), and a second communication node may be a terminal device in a new generation wireless communication system, such as a user equipment (User Equipment, UE).
  • BS base station
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • UE user equipment
  • the following embodiments may be combined with each other, and the same or similar concepts or processes may not be described in some embodiments.
  • FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a method for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the paging information transmission method provided in this embodiment is applicable to a paging in a new generation wireless communication system, and the method may be performed by a paging information transmission apparatus, and the paging information transmission apparatus passes hardware and software.
  • the apparatus can be integrated in a processor of the first communication node for processing by the processor.
  • the method in this embodiment may include:
  • step 110 the first communication node calculates a time domain location of the PO of the second communication node.
  • a manner is provided for the first communication node to send paging information to a second communication node within its coverage, and within the coverage of the first communication node, there are multiple cells, and each cell has multiple Two communication nodes.
  • the first communication node may send paging information to the different communication nodes in the PO of the second communication node. Therefore, before transmitting the paging information, the first communication node needs to calculate the time domain location of the PO for a second communication node, thereby obtaining It is known at which specific time domain locations the paging information is sent to the second communication node.
  • the first type of communication node may be a macro-micro base station, a relay node, and a network side device such as a transmission reference point (TRP), which is used in this embodiment.
  • TRP transmission reference point
  • the paging information is sent;
  • the second type of communication node may be a terminal device, or a relay node, and is used to receive paging information sent by the network side device in this embodiment.
  • the first type of communication node is a base station
  • the second type of communication node is a UE, and is not limited.
  • the first communication node sends paging information to the second communication node in the PO corresponding to the time domain location, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information and paging message;
  • the PO includes a set of paging resources that can be used for transmission of one or more preset beam or port paging information.
  • the PO may correspond to a synchronization signal window group or a scan resource corresponding to a set of preset beams or ports.
  • the first communication node may send the paging information to the second communication node in the PO corresponding to the time-frequency location.
  • the paging information includes: at least one of paging downlink control information (paging DCI) and paging message; paging downlink control information (paging DCI) is used
  • the scheduling information indicating the paging information includes one or more of the following information: resource allocation information, coded modulation mode information, frame structure parameter information, and paging message used to indicate the current paging information. Terminal identification, and the reason for paging.
  • the first communication node may also indicate to the second communication node a quasi-co-location relationship between the paging downlink control information and the paging message. Therefore, the terminal can determine the resource of the paging message according to the received resource of the paging downlink control information and the quasi-co-location relationship, and receive the paging message.
  • the transmission of paging information needs to determine the time-frequency location, the instantaneous domain location and the frequency domain location. The disclosure provides content for determining the location of the time domain.
  • a new generation of wireless communication systems introduces a beam-level transmission method, that is, by introducing a beamforming technique at both ends of the transmitting and receiving, gain is obtained, thereby improving coverage, The same is true for the transmission of paging information.
  • the difference between this and the related LTE system is that the second type of communication node needs to repeatedly send paging information in multiple beams or ports in the form of sweeping to ensure omnidirectional coverage of the first type of communication node. In this scanning mode, scanning resources tend to be introduced to carry scan transmissions.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a synchronization signal window group in a method for transmitting paging information according to the embodiment.
  • the structure of the SS burst set is used for transmitting a synchronization signal (Synchronous signal, SS) scanning resource, wherein the synchronization signal window group includes one or more synchronization signal windows (SS bursts), and one SS burst includes one or more synchronization signal blocks (SS blocks), each of which carries a specific beam or port
  • the (group) synchronization signal completes a beam scan in a synchronization signal window group, that is, completes the transmission of all beams or ports.
  • the synchronization signal block may further include a physical broadcast channel (PBCH), a demodulation reference signal corresponding to the PBCH, other control channels, and other signals such as a data channel.
  • PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • demodulation reference signal corresponding to the PBCH
  • other control channels and other signals such as a data channel.
  • the resources of the synchronization signal window group may be multiplexed with the synchronization signal, or the scanning resources of a group of beams or ports may be preset.
  • the PO of the second communication node is no longer a subframe in the LTE system, but corresponds to a complete scan resource, for example, corresponding to a SS burst set, or corresponds to a group of pre- a scanning resource, for example, the first communication node completes the transmission of the full beam direction or port of the paging information in a paging burst set, the paging burst set containing one or more A paging burst, a paging burst containing one or more paging blocks.
  • the second communication node may receive the paging message on the time-frequency resource indicated by the paging downlink control information, and determine whether there is a paging notification belonging to itself.
  • the paging information may also only include a paging message. At this time, the second communication node needs to completely receive the paging message to determine whether there is a paging notification belonging to itself.
  • the paging information may also include a paging downlink control indication and a paging message, and the second communication node first receives paging downlink control information, and receives the same synchronization signal block (SS block) or paging block according to the paging downlink control information. Paging message within (paging block).
  • the manner in which the paging information is sent in the related LTE system is that the PO of the second communication node is a frame in the LTE system, or a specific subframe of one frame.
  • the PO calculated in this embodiment includes a group of paging resources, and the group of paging resources may include one or more paging resources, which may be used for Transmission of one or more preset beam or port paging information, and the PO corresponds to a synchronization signal window group or a scan resource corresponding to a predetermined set of beams or ports, ie, the first communication node may be in the above window group or scan
  • the paging information is sent in the resource through the full beam direction or port to ensure that the paging information can be effectively received in the PO of a second communication node.
  • the first communication node calculates the time domain location of the paging occasion PO of the second communication node, and sends the PO location corresponding to the calculated time domain location to the second communication node.
  • the paging information includes paging downlink control information or/and a paging message.
  • the PO of the second communication node is set to include a group of paging resources.
  • the paging resource may be used for transmission of one or more preset beam or port paging information
  • the PO corresponds to a synchronization signal window group or a scanning resource corresponding to a group of preset beams or ports, that is, the first communication node may Transmitting paging information through the full beam direction or port in the above window group or scanning resource to ensure that paging information can be effectively received in the PO of a second communication node, thereby solving the DRX mechanism in the related LTE system.
  • paging information needs to be loaded in a transmission subframe or time slot corresponding to each beam, and The UE can not predict or beam ports scheduling of different time slots, resulting in DRX mode by paging information transmission mechanism is very complicated, difficult to implement.
  • step 110 may include the following steps:
  • the first communication node calculates a starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communication node
  • the first communication node calculates the time domain location of the PO according to the starting wireless frame number and the duration of the PO.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of another method for transmitting paging information according to the embodiment.
  • the implementation manner of S110 may be: the first communication node calculates a time domain location of the PO of the second communication node according to the PO determination parameter, and the PO determines the parameter. Includes one or more of the following:
  • the method may further include:
  • the first communication node sends the PO determination parameter to the second communication node;
  • the PO determination parameter also includes one or more of the above parameters, and sends a PO determination parameter to the second communication node for indicating
  • the two communication nodes can calculate the time domain location of the same PO according to the PO determination parameter, thereby enabling the first communication node and the second communication node to transmit and receive paging information in the same PO.
  • the discontinuous reception period of the second communication node in the PO determination parameter is a period in which the second communication node receives the paging information.
  • the method provided in this embodiment may further include:
  • the first communication node configures a discontinuous reception period of the second communication node; or, the first communication node receives a discontinuous reception period of the second communication node determined and transmitted by the second communication node.
  • the paging sending interval of the first communication node in the PO determining parameter corresponds to one PO, that is, one PO corresponding to one second communication node, that is, the first communication node is in the second paging interval to a second.
  • the communication node sends the paging information.
  • the implementation of the step 120 in this embodiment may be: the first communication node sends the paging information to the second communication node through all the beams or ports in the paging sending interval corresponding to the PO. That is to say, the first communication node can send paging information in each paging transmission interval, and complete transmission of all beams or ports in each paging transmission interval to ensure PO corresponding to the paging transmission interval.
  • the second communication node can effectively receive paging information.
  • the PO offset in the PO determination parameter is a parameter for adjusting a time domain location of a PO of the second communication node.
  • the effect of multiplexing the synchronization signal window group can be obtained by setting the PO offset.
  • the time domain location of the PO may be calculated by using the second communication node identifier of the PO determination parameter, and the implementation of step 110 may be: the first communication node according to the second communication node.
  • the identifier is calculated as a PO of the second communication node in a non-continuous reception period, and the starting radio frame number corresponding to the paging resource of the group is calculated.
  • the first communication node calculates the starting wireless frame number corresponding to the PO of the second communication node by one of the following formulas:
  • the SFN is the starting wireless frame number corresponding to the PO of the second communication node.
  • the first communication node selects one of the foregoing formulas according to the content of the PO determination parameter to calculate the starting wireless frame number corresponding to the PO.
  • the partial formula has a PO offset.
  • the method may further include: the first communication node is configured to be unified for the second communication node in the cell. PO offset.
  • the time domain location of the PO may be calculated by using the PO offset in the PO determination parameter.
  • the implementation of step 110 may include:
  • the first communication node configures a preset PO offset for the second communication node
  • the first communication node calculates, according to the configured PO offset, a group of paging resources in the discontinuous reception period as the PO of the second communication node, and calculates a starting radio frame number corresponding to the group of paging resources.
  • the first communication node may further configure a PO offset for each second communication node in the cell, and the PO offset configured by each second communication node is the same. Or different, different PO offsets are used to configure the second communication node into different POs.
  • the method provided in this embodiment calculates the starting radio frame of the PO of the second communication node.
  • the method may further include: the first communication node calculating a starting subframe position of the starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communication node.
  • the implementation of the step 120 may be: the first communication node sends the paging information to the second communication node in the PO corresponding to the start subframe position of the starting radio frame number.
  • the implementation manner of calculating the starting subframe position of the starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communications node may include: calculating, by the first communications node, the starting wireless frame of the PO of the second communications node according to the second communications node identifier The starting subframe position of the number.
  • the radio frame length is 2n milliseconds (ms)
  • the radio frame includes 2m subframes
  • the paging interval of the first communication node is n milliseconds
  • the starting subframe position is subframe 0 or subframe m
  • the starting subframe position may be represented by the last bit bit of the second communication node identifier (Device_ID), for example by 0 or 1.
  • the second communication node may also determine the manner in which the paging information is received by the quasi-common position relationship information.
  • the communication between the first communication node and the second communication node is pre-configured with quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels, that is, the foregoing communication node adopts a common protocol or The associated system pre-defines the quasi-co-location relationship information.
  • the method before step 120, further includes: the first communication node instructing the second communication node, where the indication information is a quasi-co-location relationship between the paging information related signal and other scan signals or channels. information.
  • the paging information related signal is a reference signal for demodulating paging information, for example, a demodulation reference signal of a paging message; or the paging information related signal is used for demodulating paging.
  • a reference signal of the information-related physical control channel for example, a demodulation reference signal of a downlink physical control channel carrying paging downlink control information (paging DCI).
  • the other scan signals or channels include one or more of the following signals or channels: synchronization signal (SS), demodulation reference signal of physical broadcast channel (PBCH), beam reference signal (BRS), demodulation Demodulation reference signal (DMRS), Mobility reference signal (MRS), Channel State Information-Reference Signals (CSI-RS).
  • the quasi-common position relationship information includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • the mapping relationship of resources includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a paging information transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the transmission apparatus of the paging information is implemented by a combination of hardware and software, and the apparatus can be integrated in the A processor of a communication node is used by the processor to invoke.
  • the paging information transmission apparatus 100 of this embodiment may include: a calculation module 110 and a transmission module 120.
  • the calculation module 110 is configured to calculate a time domain location of the paging occasion PO of the second communication node.
  • a manner is provided for the first communication node to send paging information to a second communication node within its coverage, and within the coverage of the first communication node, there are multiple cells, and each cell has multiple Two communication nodes.
  • the first communication node may send paging information to the different communication nodes in the PO of the second communication node. Therefore, before transmitting the paging information, the first communication node needs to calculate the time domain location of the PO for a second communication node, thereby obtaining It is known at which specific time domain locations the paging information is sent to the second communication node.
  • the entities and functions of the first type of communication node and the second type of communication node involved in this embodiment have been described in detail in the foregoing embodiments, and thus are not described herein again.
  • the sending module 120 is configured to send paging information to the second communications node in the PO corresponding to the time domain location calculated by the calculating module 110, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information and paging message
  • the PO comprises a set of paging resources, and the set of paging resources can be used for transmission of one or more preset beam or port paging information.
  • the PO may correspond to a synchronization signal window group or a scan resource corresponding to a set of preset beams or ports.
  • the first communication node may send the paging information to the second communication node in the PO corresponding to the time-frequency location.
  • the paging information includes: paging downlink control information or/and a paging message, and the content and role of the paging downlink control information and the paging message, and the synchronization signal window group and the detailed description have been described in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the structure of the scanning resource of the preset beam or port is not described here.
  • the second communication node may receive the paging message on the time-frequency resource indicated by the paging downlink control information, and determine whether there is a paging notification belonging to itself.
  • the paging information may also only include a paging message. At this time, the second communication node needs to completely receive the paging message to determine whether there is a paging notification belonging to itself.
  • the paging information may also include a paging downlink control indication and a paging message, and first receive paging downlink control information, and receive the same synchronization signal block (SS block) or paging block (paging block) according to the paging downlink control information. Paging message within ).
  • SS block synchronization signal block
  • paging block paging block
  • the paging information transmission apparatus provided in this embodiment is used to perform the method for transmitting paging information provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 and has a corresponding function module.
  • the implementation principle and the technical effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the computing module 110 can include:
  • a first calculating unit configured to calculate a starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communication node
  • the second calculating unit is configured to calculate the time domain position of the PO according to the duration of the PO and the starting wireless frame number calculated by the first calculating unit.
  • the calculation module 110 calculates the time domain location of the PO of the second communication node by calculating the time domain location of the PO of the second communication node according to the PO determination parameter, where the PO determination parameter includes the following one. Or multiple:
  • the sending module 120 of the paging information transmission apparatus 100 is further configured to send the PO determination parameter to the second communication node before transmitting the paging information; the PO determining parameter also includes one of the foregoing parameters. And a plurality of items, sending a PO determination parameter to the second communication node, to indicate that the second communication node can calculate the time domain location of the same PO according to the PO determination parameter, thereby enabling the first communication node and the second communication The node transmits and receives paging information within the same PO.
  • the discontinuous reception period of the second communication node in the PO determination parameter is a period in which the second communication node receives paging information
  • FIG. 5 is another transmission of paging information provided in this embodiment.
  • the paging information transmission apparatus 100 provided in this embodiment may further include one or more of the configuration module 130 and the receiving module 140.
  • the apparatus shown in FIG. The configuration module 130 and the receiving module 140 are shown as an example.
  • the configuration module 130 is configured to configure a discontinuous reception period of the second communication node before the calculation module 110 calculates the time domain location of the PO of the second communication node;
  • the receiving module 140 is configured to receive a discontinuous reception period of the second communication node determined and transmitted by the second communication node before the calculation module 110 calculates the time domain location of the PO of the second communication node.
  • the paging transmission interval of the first communication node in the PO determination parameter corresponds to one PO, that is, one PO corresponding to one second communication node
  • the sending module 120 in this embodiment sends the paging module 120 to the second communication node.
  • the paging information may be implemented by: sending paging information to the second communication node through all the beams or ports in the paging sending interval corresponding to the PO. That is to say, the first communication node can send paging information in each paging transmission interval, and complete transmission of all beams or ports in each paging transmission interval to ensure PO corresponding to the paging transmission interval.
  • the second communication node can effectively receive paging information.
  • the PO offset in the PO determination parameter is a parameter for adjusting a time domain location of a PO of the second communication node.
  • the effect of multiplexing the synchronization signal window group can be obtained by setting the PO offset.
  • the time domain location of the PO may be calculated by the second communication node identifier in the PO determination parameter, and the calculation module 110 calculates the implementation manner of the time domain location of the PO of the second communication node.
  • the method may be: calculating, according to the identifier of the second communication node, a group of paging resources in the discontinuous reception period as the PO of the second communication node, and calculating a starting wireless frame number corresponding to the paging resource of the group.
  • the calculation module 110 calculates the starting wireless frame number corresponding to the PO of the second communication node by one of the following formulas:
  • the SFN is the starting wireless frame number corresponding to the PO of the second communication node.
  • the first communication node selects one of the foregoing formulas according to the content of the PO determination parameter to calculate the starting wireless frame number corresponding to the PO.
  • the partial formula has a PO offset.
  • the configuration module 130 in the paging information transmission apparatus 100 is further configured to calculate the second in the calculation module 110. Prior to the time domain location of the PO of the communication node, a uniform PO offset is configured for the second communication node within the cell.
  • the time domain location of the PO may be calculated by using the PO offset in the PO determination parameter, and the calculation module 110 calculates the implementation manner of the time domain location of the PO of the second communication node.
  • the method may include: configuring a preset PO offset for the second communication node; calculating, according to the configured PO offset, a group of paging resources in the discontinuous reception period as the PO of the second communication node, and calculating the group The starting wireless frame number corresponding to the paging resource.
  • the configuration module 130 is further configured to configure a PO offset for each second communication node in the cell before the calculation module 110 calculates the time domain location of the PO of the second communication node, and each The PO offsets configured by the second communication node are the same or different, and different PO offsets are used to configure the second communication node into different POs.
  • the calculation module 110 in this embodiment may further include: a third calculation unit, configured to be After calculating the starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communication node, the first calculating unit calculates the starting subframe position of the starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communication node.
  • the sending module 120 may send the paging information by sending the paging information to the second communication node in the PO corresponding to the starting subframe position of the starting wireless frame number.
  • the third computing unit calculates an implementation manner of the starting subframe position of the starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communications node, and may include: calculating a starting wireless frame of the PO of the second communications node according to the second communications node identifier. The starting subframe position of the number.
  • the radio frame length is 2n milliseconds (ms)
  • the radio frame includes 2m subframes
  • the paging interval of the first communication node is n milliseconds
  • the starting subframe position is subframe 0 or subframe m
  • the starting subframe position may be represented by the last bit bit of the second communication node identifier (Device_ID), for example by 0 or 1.
  • the second communication node may also determine the manner in which the paging information is received by the quasi-common position relationship information.
  • the communication between the first communication node and the second communication node is pre-configured with quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels, that is, the foregoing communication node adopts a common protocol or The associated system pre-defines the quasi-co-location relationship information.
  • the sending module 120 is further configured to: before sending the paging information to the second communications node, send the indication information to the second communications node, where the indication information is a paging information related signal and other scanning signals or Quasi-common positional relationship information between channels.
  • the paging information related signal is a reference signal for demodulating paging information, for example, a demodulation reference signal of a paging message; or the paging information related signal is used for demodulating paging.
  • a reference signal of the information-related physical control channel for example, a demodulation reference signal of a downlink physical control channel carrying paging downlink control information (paging DCI).
  • the above other scanning signals or channels include one or more of the following signals or channels: synchronization signal (SS), demodulation reference signal of physical broadcast channel (PBCH), beam reference signal (BRS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS) ), Mobility Reference Signal (MRS), Channel State Indicator Reference Signal (CSI-RS).
  • the quasi-common position relationship information includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • the mapping relationship of resources includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • the paging information transmission apparatus provided in this embodiment is used to perform the paging information transmission method provided in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and has a corresponding function module, and the implementation principle and the technical effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of still another method for transmitting paging information according to the embodiment.
  • the paging information transmission method provided in this embodiment is applicable to a paging in a new generation wireless communication system, and the method may be performed by a paging information transmission apparatus, and the paging information transmission apparatus passes hardware and software.
  • the device can be integrated into the processor of the second communication node for use by the processor.
  • the method in this embodiment may include:
  • step 210 the second communication node calculates a time domain location of the PO of the second communication node.
  • a manner is provided for the first communication node to send paging information to a second communication node within its coverage, and within the coverage of the first communication node, there are multiple cells, and each cell has multiple Two communication nodes.
  • the first communication node may send paging information to the different communication nodes in the PO of the second communication node. Therefore, before transmitting the paging information, the first communication node needs to calculate the time domain location of the PO for a second communication node, thereby obtaining It is known at which specific time domain locations the paging information is sent to the second communication node.
  • the entities and functions of the first type of communication node and the second type of communication node involved in this embodiment have been described in detail in the foregoing embodiments, and thus are not described herein again.
  • the second communication node receives the paging information sent by the first communication node in the PO corresponding to the time domain location, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information and paging message;
  • the PO includes a set of paging resources that can be used for transmission of one or more preset beam or port paging information.
  • the PO may correspond to a synchronization signal window group or a scan resource corresponding to a set of preset beams or ports.
  • the paging information that is sent by the first communication node may be received in the PO corresponding to the time-frequency position.
  • the paging information includes: paging downlink control information or/and a paging message, and the content and role of the paging downlink control information and the paging message, and the synchronization signal window group and the detailed description have been described in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the structure of the scanning resource of the preset beam or port is not described here.
  • the second communication node needs to determine the synchronization signal window group belonging to itself and receive a potential paging message within the specified synchronization signal window group.
  • the second communication node completes the preferred transmit and receive beam training of the downlink before receiving the paging message, so that the terminal may use the preferred receive beam at the first communication node to preferably transmit the sync signal block corresponding to the transmit beam.
  • a paging message is received within (SS block).
  • the second communication node may receive the paging message on the time-frequency resource indicated by the paging downlink control information, and determine whether there is a paging notification belonging to itself.
  • the paging information may also only include a paging message. At this time, the second communication node needs to completely receive the paging message to determine whether there is a paging notification belonging to itself.
  • the paging information may also include a paging downlink control indication and a paging message, and first receive paging downlink control information, and receive the same synchronization signal block (SS block) or paging block (paging block) according to the paging downlink control information. Paging message within ).
  • SS block synchronization signal block
  • paging block paging block
  • the second communication node calculates the time domain location of the paging occasion PO of the second communication node, and receives the first communication node in the PO corresponding to the calculated time domain location.
  • the paging information includes paging downlink control information or/and a paging message; in the technical solution provided by this embodiment, by setting the PO of the second communication node to include a group of paging resources And the PO corresponds to a synchronization signal window group or a scan resource corresponding to a group of preset beams or ports, that is, the first communication node may send paging information through the full beam direction or port in the above window group or scanning resource, It is ensured that the paging information can be effectively received in the PO of a second communication node, thereby solving the problem that the method for receiving paging information through the DRX mechanism in the related LTE system is applied to the next generation wireless communication system, and The paging information is loaded in the transmission sub
  • step 210 may include the following steps:
  • the second communication node calculates a starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communication node
  • the second communication node calculates the time domain location of the PO according to the starting wireless frame number and the duration of the PO.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of still another method for transmitting paging information according to the embodiment.
  • the method provided in this embodiment may further include: before step 210:
  • step 200 the second communication node receives the PO determination parameter sent by the first communication node
  • the implementation manner of S210 in this embodiment may be: the second communication node calculates a time domain location of the PO of the second communication node according to the PO determination parameter, where the PO determination parameter may be received by the second communication node from the first communication node, and It can be configured in the second communication node.
  • the PO determination parameters include one or more of the following:
  • the discontinuous reception period T DRX may be configured and sent by the first communication node, or may be configured by the second communication node itself, and the second communication node identifier Device_ID is configured in the second communication node, and the PO is biased.
  • the shift is configured for the first communication node and sent to the second communication node.
  • the discontinuous reception period of the second communication node in the PO determination parameter is a period in which the second communication node receives the paging information
  • the method provided in this embodiment may further include: The second communication node receives a discontinuous reception period of the second communication node configured and transmitted by the communication node; or the second communication node configures the discontinuous reception period of the second communication node.
  • the paging sending interval of the first communication node in the PO determining parameter corresponds to a PO.
  • the implementation manner of step 220 in this embodiment may be: the second communication node receives the first communication node in the PO. Paging information sent through all beams or ports within the corresponding paging transmission interval. That is to say, the first communication node can send paging information in each paging transmission interval, and complete transmission of all beams or ports in each paging transmission interval to ensure PO corresponding to the paging transmission interval. The second communication node can effectively receive paging information.
  • the paging transmission interval T paging of the first communication node and the PO offset t offset of the second communication node in the foregoing PO determination parameters have been described in the foregoing embodiment, and therefore are not described herein again. .
  • the time domain location of the PO may be calculated by using the second communication node identifier of the PO determination parameter, and the implementation of step 210 may be: the second communication node according to the second communication node.
  • the identifier is calculated as a PO of the second communication node in a non-continuous reception period, and the starting radio frame number corresponding to the paging resource of the group is calculated.
  • the second communication node calculates the starting wireless frame number corresponding to the PO of the second communication node by one of the following formulas:
  • the SFN is the starting wireless frame number corresponding to the PO of the second communication node.
  • the second communication node selects one of the foregoing formulas according to the content of the PO determination parameter to calculate the starting wireless frame number corresponding to the PO.
  • the partial formula has a PO offset, and in this implementation, the second communication node in the cell is configured with a uniform PO offset.
  • the time domain location of the PO may be calculated by using the PO offset in the PO determination parameter, and the second communication node in the cell is configured with a preset PO offset.
  • the implementation manner of the step 210 may include: the second communication node calculates, according to the configured PO offset, a group of paging resources in the discontinuous reception period as the PO of the second communication node, and calculates the group. The starting wireless frame number corresponding to the paging resource.
  • each second communication node in the cell is configured with a PO offset
  • the PO offset configured by each second communication node is the same or different, and different PO offsets are used.
  • the second communication node is configured into different POs.
  • the method provided in this embodiment calculates the starting radio frame of the PO of the second communication node.
  • the second communication node may further calculate a starting subframe position of the starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communication node.
  • the implementation of step 220 may be: the second communication node receives the paging information sent by the first communication node in the PO corresponding to the start subframe position of the starting radio frame number.
  • the implementation manner of calculating the starting subframe position of the starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communication node may include: calculating, by the second communications node, the starting point of the PO of the second communications node according to the second communications node identifier The starting subframe position of the frame number.
  • the radio frame length is 2n milliseconds (ms)
  • the radio frame includes 2m subframes
  • the paging interval of the first communication node is n milliseconds
  • the starting subframe position is subframe 0 or subframe m
  • the starting subframe position may be represented by the last bit bit of the second communication node identifier (Device_ID), for example by 0 or 1.
  • the second communication node may also determine the manner in which the paging information is received by the quasi-common position relationship information.
  • the communication between the second communication node and the first communication node is pre-configured with quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels, that is, the foregoing communication node adopts a common protocol or The associated system pre-defines the quasi-co-location relationship information.
  • the method before step 220, the method further includes: step 211, the second communication node receives the indication information sent by the first communication node, where the indication information is between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels. Quasi-common positional relationship information.
  • the method for transmitting paging information may further include: before step 220, the second communication node performs measurement according to a signal or channel information that has a quasi-co-location relationship with a signal related to the paging information. Or receiving, determining the manner in which the second communication node receives the paging information.
  • the receiving mode refers to a resource for receiving paging information, and a receiving beam or port, that is, which resource of the paging occasion (a group of paging resources) corresponding to the paging information related signal is used by the second communication node. Receive paging information related signals.
  • the paging information related signal is a reference signal for demodulating paging information, for example, a demodulation reference signal of a paging message; or the paging information related signal is used for demodulating paging.
  • a reference signal of the information-related physical control channel for example, a demodulation reference signal of a downlink physical control channel carrying paging downlink control information (paging DCI).
  • the above other scanning signals or channels include one or more of the following signals or channels: synchronization signal (SS), demodulation reference signal of physical broadcast channel (PBCH), beam reference signal (BRS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS) ), mobility reference signal MRS), channel status indication reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • the quasi-common position relationship information includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • the mapping relationship of resources includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of still another apparatus for transmitting paging information according to the embodiment.
  • the transmission apparatus of the paging information is implemented by a combination of hardware and software, and the apparatus can be integrated in the The processor of the second communication node is used by the processor for calling.
  • the paging information transmission apparatus 200 of this embodiment may include: a calculation module 210 and a receiving module 220.
  • the calculation module 110 is configured to calculate a time domain location of the PO of the second communication node.
  • a manner is provided for the first communication node to send paging information to a second communication node within its coverage, and within the coverage of the first communication node, there are multiple cells, and each cell has multiple Two communication nodes.
  • the first communication node may send paging information to the different communication nodes in the PO of the second communication node. Therefore, before transmitting the paging information, the first communication node needs to calculate the time domain location of the PO for a second communication node, thereby obtaining It is known at which specific time domain locations the paging information is sent to the second communication node.
  • the entities and functions of the first type of communication node and the second type of communication node involved in this embodiment have been described in detail in the foregoing embodiments, and thus are not described herein again.
  • the receiving module 220 is configured to receive paging information sent by the first communications node in the PO corresponding to the time domain location calculated by the calculating module 210, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information and paging a message; wherein the PO includes a set of paging resources, and the set of paging resources can be used for transmission of one or more preset beam or port paging information.
  • the PO may correspond to a synchronization signal window group or a scan resource corresponding to a set of preset beams or ports.
  • the calculation module 210 of the second communication node after the calculation module 210 of the second communication node calculates the time-frequency position of the PO of the first communication node for the PO, it can send the first communication node to the PO corresponding to the time-frequency location.
  • the paging information includes: paging downlink control information or/and a paging message, and the content and role of the paging downlink control information and the paging message, and the synchronization signal window group and the detailed description have been described in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the structure of the scanning resource of the preset beam or port is not described here.
  • the receiving module 220 of the second communication node may receive the paging message on the time-frequency resource indicated by the paging downlink control information, and determine whether there is a paging notification belonging to itself.
  • the paging information may also include only the paging message. At this time, the receiving module 220 needs to completely receive the paging message to determine whether there is a paging notification belonging to itself.
  • the paging information may also include a paging downlink control indication and a paging message, and the receiving module 220 first receives paging downlink control information, and receives the same synchronization signal block (SS block) or paging block according to the paging downlink control information. Paging message within the paging block).
  • SS block synchronization signal block
  • the paging information transmission apparatus provided in this embodiment is used to perform the paging information transmission method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, and has a corresponding function module, and the implementation principle and the technical effect thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the computing module 210 can include:
  • a first calculating unit configured to calculate a starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communication node
  • the second calculating unit is configured to calculate the time domain position of the PO according to the duration of the PO and the starting wireless frame number calculated by the first calculating unit.
  • the receiving module 220 is further configured to receive the PO determining parameter sent by the first communications node before the calculating module 110 calculates the time domain location of the PO of the second communications node; accordingly, the calculating module 110 calculates the second
  • the time domain location of the PO of the communication node may be implemented by: calculating a time domain location of the PO of the second communication node according to the PO determination parameter, where the PO determination parameter may be received by the receiving module 220 from the first communication node, or may be
  • the PO determining parameter configured in the second communication node includes one or more of the following:
  • the discontinuous reception period T DRX may be configured and sent by the first communication node, or may be configured by the second communication node itself, and the second communication node identifier Device_ID is configured in the second communication node, and the PO is biased.
  • the shift is configured for the first communication node and sent to the second communication node.
  • the discontinuous reception period of the second communication node in the PO determination parameter is a period in which the second communication node receives paging information
  • FIG. 9 is another transmission of paging information provided in this embodiment.
  • the receiving module 220 in this embodiment is further configured to receive, before the calculating module 210 calculates the time domain location of the PO of the second communication node, the discontinuous reception period of the second communication node configured and sent by the first communication node;
  • the configuration module 230 is configured to configure the discontinuous reception period of the second communication node before the calculation module 210 calculates the time domain location of the PO of the second communication node.
  • the paging sending interval of the first communication node in the PO determining parameter corresponds to a PO.
  • the receiving module 220 in this embodiment receives the paging information sent by the first communications node, and may be: Receiving paging information sent by the first communication node through all beams or ports in a paging transmission interval corresponding to the PO. That is to say, the first communication node can send paging information in each paging transmission interval, and complete transmission of all beams or ports in each paging transmission interval to ensure PO corresponding to the paging transmission interval.
  • the second communication node can effectively receive paging information.
  • the paging transmission interval T paging of the first communication node and the PO offset t offset of the second communication node in the foregoing PO determination parameters have been described in the foregoing embodiment, and therefore are not described herein again. .
  • the time domain location of the PO may be calculated by the second communication node identifier in the PO determination parameter, and the calculation module 210 calculates the implementation manner of the time domain location of the PO of the second communication node.
  • the method may be: calculating, according to the identifier of the second communication node, a group of paging resources in the discontinuous reception period as the PO of the second communication node, and calculating a starting wireless frame number corresponding to the paging resource of the group.
  • the calculation module 210 calculates the starting wireless frame number corresponding to the PO of the second communication node by one of the following formulas:
  • the SFN is the starting wireless frame number corresponding to the PO of the second communication node.
  • the calculation module 210 selects one of the foregoing formulas according to the content of the PO determination parameter to calculate the starting wireless frame number corresponding to the PO.
  • the partial formula has a PO offset, and in this implementation, the second communication node in the cell is configured with a uniform PO offset.
  • the time domain location of the PO may be calculated by using the PO offset in the PO determination parameter, and the second communication node in the cell is configured with a preset PO offset.
  • the implementation manner of the calculation module 210 for calculating the time domain location of the PO of the second communication node may include: calculating, according to the configured PO offset, a group of paging resources in the discontinuous reception period as the second communication node. PO, and calculate the starting wireless frame number corresponding to the paging resource of the group.
  • each second communication node in the cell is configured with a PO offset
  • the PO offset configured by each second communication node is the same or different, and different PO offsets are used.
  • the second communication node is configured into different POs.
  • the calculation module in this embodiment may further include: a third calculation unit, configured to be After calculating the starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communication node, the calculating unit calculates the starting subframe position of the starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communication node.
  • the receiving module 220 in the embodiment may receive the paging information sent by the first communication node by receiving the paging information sent by the first communication node in the PO corresponding to the starting subframe position of the starting wireless frame number. .
  • the third computing unit calculates the implementation manner of the starting subframe position of the starting wireless frame number of the PO of the second communications node, and may include: calculating a starting point of the PO of the second communications node according to the second communications node identifier. The starting subframe position of the frame number.
  • the radio frame length is 2n milliseconds (ms)
  • the radio frame includes 2m subframes
  • the paging interval of the first communication node is n milliseconds
  • the starting subframe position is subframe 0 or subframe m
  • the starting subframe position may be represented by the last bit bit of the second communication node identifier (Device_ID), for example by 0 or 1.
  • the second communication node may also determine the manner in which the paging information is received by the quasi-common position relationship information.
  • the communication between the second communication node and the first communication node is pre-configured with quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels, that is, the foregoing communication node adopts a common protocol or The associated system pre-defines the quasi-co-location relationship information.
  • the receiving module 220 is further configured to: before receiving the paging information sent by the first communications node, receive the indication information sent by the first communications node, where the indication information is a paging information related signal and other scanning Quasi-co-location relationship information between signals or channels.
  • the transmission device 200 for paging information may further include: a determining module 240, configured to: before the receiving module 220 receives the paging information sent by the first communication node, according to the signal related to the paging information The measurement or reception of the signal or channel information of the quasi-co-location relationship determines the manner in which the second communication node receives the paging information.
  • a determining module 240 configured to: before the receiving module 220 receives the paging information sent by the first communication node, according to the signal related to the paging information The measurement or reception of the signal or channel information of the quasi-co-location relationship determines the manner in which the second communication node receives the paging information.
  • the paging information related signal is a reference signal for demodulating paging information, for example, a demodulation reference signal of a paging message; or the paging information related signal is used for demodulating paging.
  • a reference signal of the information-related physical control channel for example, a demodulation reference signal of a downlink physical control channel carrying paging downlink control information (paging DCI).
  • the above other scanning signals or channels include one or more of the following signals or channels: synchronization signal (SS), demodulation reference signal of physical broadcast channel (PBCH), beam reference signal (BRS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS) ), Mobility Reference Signal (MRS), Channel State Indicator Reference Signal (CSI-RS).
  • the quasi-common position relationship information includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • the mapping relationship of resources includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • the paging information transmission apparatus provided in this embodiment is used to perform the method for transmitting paging information provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, and has a corresponding function module, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of still another method for transmitting paging information according to the embodiment.
  • the paging information transmission method provided in this embodiment is applicable to a paging in a new generation wireless communication system, and the method may be performed by a paging information transmission apparatus, and the paging information transmission apparatus passes hardware and software. In a combined manner, the apparatus can be integrated into the processor of the first communication node for use by the processor.
  • the method in this embodiment may include:
  • the first communication node sends indication information to the second communication node, where the indication information is quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels; or, the first communication node and the The second communication node configures quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels.
  • a manner is provided for the first communication node to send paging information to a second communication node within its coverage, and within the coverage of the first communication node, there are multiple cells, and each cell has multiple Two communication nodes.
  • the first communication node may indicate to the second communication node on which resources the paging information is received by indicating the quasi-common position relationship information; or may indicate to the second communication node by configuring the quasi-common position relationship information
  • the paging information is received on the resource, that is, the communication node may pre-define the quasi-co-location relationship information through a common protocol or a system, that is, the second communication node may know at which specific time domain locations the first communication node is received. It sends a paging message.
  • the first communication node sends paging information to the second communication node according to the quasi-common position relationship information, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information and paging message.
  • the second communication node may be configured to the second resource.
  • the communication node transmits the paging information.
  • the second communication node may also determine which resources to receive the paging information based on the known quasi-common position relationship information.
  • the paging information includes: paging downlink control information or/and a paging message. The content and role of the paging downlink control information and the paging message have been described in detail in the foregoing embodiment, so Narration.
  • the first communication node sends the indication information carrying the quasi-co-location relationship information to the second communication node, or the same configuration is configured in the first communication node and the second communication node.
  • the quasi-co-location information the first communication node sends the paging information to the second communication node according to the quasi-co-location relationship information, where the paging information includes the paging downlink control information or/and the paging message; the technology provided in this embodiment
  • the first communication node and the second communication node are made aware of the quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels, and the paging information is sent based on the quasi-co-location information.
  • the second communication node can ensure that the paging information can be effectively received, thereby solving the problem that the method for receiving paging information through the DRX mechanism in the related LTE system is applied to the next-generation wireless communication system, and the corresponding transmission carrier in each beam is needed.
  • Paging information is loaded in a frame or time slot, and the UE cannot predict the beam or port in different time slots due to the IDLE state.
  • the scheduling situation which leads to the transmission of paging information through the DRX mechanism, is very complicated and difficult to implement.
  • the paging information related signal is a reference signal for demodulating paging information, for example, a demodulation reference signal of a paging message; or the paging information related signal is used for demodulating paging.
  • a reference signal of the information-related physical control channel for example, a demodulation reference signal of a downlink physical control channel carrying paging downlink control information (paging DCI).
  • the above other scanning signals or channels include one or more of the following signals or channels: synchronization signal (SS), demodulation reference signal of physical broadcast channel (PBCH), beam reference signal (BRS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS) ), Mobility Reference Signal (MRS), Channel State Indicator Reference Signal (CSI-RS).
  • the quasi-common position relationship information includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • the mapping relationship of resources includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the transmission apparatus of the paging information is implemented by a combination of hardware and software, and the apparatus can be integrated in the A processor of a communication node is used by the processor to invoke.
  • the paging information transmission apparatus 300 of this embodiment may include: a sending module 310 and a configuration module 320.
  • the sending module 310 is configured to send the indication information to the second communication node, where the indication information is quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels; or, the configuration module 320 is configured to be configured. Quasi-co-location relationship information between paging information related signals and other scanning signals or channels in a communication node.
  • a manner is provided for the first communication node to send paging information to a second communication node within its coverage, and within the coverage of the first communication node, there are multiple cells, and each cell has multiple Two communication nodes.
  • the sending module 310 of the first communication node may indicate to the second communication node, on which resources the paging information is received, by means of indicating the quasi-co-location information, or may configure the quasi-common position relationship information by using the configuration module 320.
  • the second communication node indicates on which resources the paging information is received, that is, the communication node can pre-define the quasi-co-location relationship information through a common protocol or the associated system, that is, the second communication node can know which specific time domain location
  • the receiving first paging node sends a paging message thereto.
  • the sending module 310 is further configured to send paging information to the second communications node according to the quasi-co-location relationship information, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information and paging message.
  • the second communication node may be on the resource corresponding to the quasi-common position relationship information.
  • the paging information is sent.
  • the second communication node may also determine which resources to receive paging information based on the known quasi-common position relationship information.
  • the paging information includes: paging downlink control information or/and a paging message. The content and role of the paging downlink control information and the paging message have been described in detail in the foregoing embodiments, and therefore are not described herein again. .
  • the paging information transmission apparatus provided in this embodiment is used to perform the method for transmitting paging information provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, and has a corresponding function module, and the implementation principle and the technical effect thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the paging information related signal is a reference signal for demodulating paging information, for example, a demodulation reference signal of a paging message; or the paging information related signal is used for demodulating paging.
  • a reference signal of the information-related physical control channel for example, a demodulation reference signal of a downlink physical control channel carrying paging downlink control information (paging DCI).
  • the above other scanning signals or channels include one or more of the following signals or channels: synchronization signal (SS), demodulation reference signal of physical broadcast channel (PBCH), beam reference signal (BRS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS) ), Mobility Reference Signal (MRS), Channel State Indicator Reference Signal (CSI-RS).
  • the quasi-common position relationship information includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • the mapping relationship of resources includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of still another method for transmitting paging information according to the embodiment.
  • the paging information transmission method provided in this embodiment is applicable to a paging in a new generation wireless communication system, and the method may be performed by a paging information transmission apparatus, and the paging information transmission apparatus passes hardware and software.
  • the device can be integrated into the processor of the second communication node for use by the processor.
  • the method in this embodiment may include:
  • the second communication node receives the first communication node sending indication information, where the indication information is quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels; or, the second communication node and the A communication node configures quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels.
  • a manner is provided for the first communication node to send paging information to a second communication node within its coverage, and within the coverage of the first communication node, there are multiple cells, and each cell has multiple Two communication nodes.
  • the second communication node may confirm which resources to receive the paging information by receiving the quasi-common position relationship information sent by the first communication node, and may also confirm the resources on which the resource is received by configuring the quasi-common position relationship information.
  • Calling information that is, the above-mentioned communication node can pre-define the quasi-co-location relationship information through a common protocol or a system to which the second communication node can know which specific time domain location to receive the first communication node to send a page to. information.
  • the entities and functions of the first type of communication node and the second type of communication node involved in this embodiment have been described in detail in the foregoing embodiments, and thus are not described herein again.
  • the second communication node receives the paging information sent by the first communication node according to the quasi-common position relationship information, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information and paging message.
  • the first communication may be received on the resource corresponding to the quasi-common position relationship information.
  • the paging information sent by the node to the node in addition, the first communication node may also determine on which resources the paging information is sent according to the known quasi-common position relationship information.
  • the paging information includes: paging downlink control information or/and a paging message. The content and role of the paging downlink control information and the paging message have been described in detail in the foregoing embodiment, so Narration.
  • the method for transmitting paging information receives the indication information carried by the first communication node and carries the information about the quasi-co-location relationship by the second communication node, or is configured by the first communication node and the second communication node.
  • the second communication node receives the paging information sent by the first communication node according to the quasi-common position relationship information, where the paging information includes paging downlink control information or/and a paging message;
  • the first communication node and the second communication node are made aware of the quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels, and the information is transmitted based on the quasi-co-location information.
  • the paging information is loaded in the corresponding transmission subframe or time slot, and the UE cannot predict the beam or the end due to the IDLE state.
  • resulting in transmission of the paging information by the DRX mechanism is very complex manner, is difficult to implement.
  • the paging information related signal is a reference signal for demodulating paging information, for example, a demodulation reference signal of a paging message; or the paging information related signal is used for demodulating paging.
  • a reference signal of the information-related physical control channel for example, a demodulation reference signal of a downlink physical control channel carrying paging downlink control information (paging DCI).
  • the above other scanning signals or channels include one or more of the following signals or channels: synchronization signal (SS), demodulation reference signal of physical broadcast channel (PBCH), beam reference signal (BRS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS) ), Mobility Reference Signal (MRS), Channel State Indicator Reference Signal (CSI-RS).
  • the quasi-common position relationship information includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • the mapping relationship of resources includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • the method may further include:
  • the second communication node determines the manner in which the second communication node receives the paging information according to the measurement or reception of the signal or channel information in the quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for transmitting paging information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the transmission apparatus of the paging information is implemented by a combination of hardware and software, and the apparatus can be integrated in the The processor of the second communication node is used by the processor for calling.
  • the paging information transmission apparatus 400 of this embodiment may include: a receiving module 410 and a configuration module 420.
  • the receiving module 410 is configured to receive the first communication node sending indication information, where the indication information is quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels; or, the configuration module 420 is configured to be configured. Quasi-co-location relationship information between the paging information related signal and the other scanning signals or channels in the second communication node.
  • a manner is provided for the first communication node to send paging information to a second communication node within its coverage, and within the coverage of the first communication node, there are multiple cells, and each cell has multiple Two communication nodes.
  • the receiving module 410 of the second communication node may confirm the resources on which the paging information is received by receiving the quasi-common position relationship information.
  • the configuration module 420 may also configure the quasi-common position relationship information to confirm which resources are received.
  • Paging information that is, the foregoing communication node may pre-define the quasi-co-location relationship information through a common protocol or a system to which the second communication node can learn to receive the first communication node to send to the specific communication node. Call information.
  • the receiving module 410 is further configured to receive, according to the quasi-co-location information, the paging information sent by the first communications node, where the paging information includes one or more of the following: paging downlink control information and paging message.
  • the first communication node may be received on the resource corresponding to the quasi-common position relationship information.
  • the paging information sent by the first communication node may also determine, on the basis of the known quasi-common position relationship information, on which resources the paging information is transmitted.
  • the paging information includes: paging downlink control information or/and a paging message. The content and role of the paging downlink control information and the paging message have been described in detail in the foregoing embodiment, so Narration.
  • the paging information transmission apparatus provided in this embodiment is used to perform the method for transmitting paging information provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 12, and has a corresponding function module, and the implementation principle and the technical effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the paging information related signal is a reference signal for demodulating paging information, for example, a demodulation reference signal of a paging message; or the paging information related signal is used for demodulating paging.
  • a reference signal of the information-related physical control channel for example, a demodulation reference signal of a downlink physical control channel carrying paging downlink control information (paging DCI).
  • the above other scanning signals or channels include one or more of the following signals or channels: synchronization signal (SS), demodulation reference signal of physical broadcast channel (PBCH), beam reference signal (BRS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS) ), Mobility Reference Signal (MRS), Channel State Indicator Reference Signal (CSI-RS).
  • the quasi-common position relationship information includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • the mapping relationship of resources includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • the paging information transmission apparatus 400 may further include:
  • the determining module 430 is configured to determine, before the receiving module 410 receives the paging information sent by the first communications node, the second communications node according to the measurement or receiving of the signal or channel information that has a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal. How to receive paging information.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a paging information transmission system, where the paging information transmission system includes a first communication node 10 and at least one second communication node 20.
  • the first communication node 10 is configured with the transmission device 100 of the paging information in any of the embodiments shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, and each of the second communication nodes 20 is configured with FIG. 8 and The transmission device 200 for paging information in any of the embodiments shown in FIG.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a manner in which three second communication nodes 20 are included in a transmission system of paging information, and each network element in the transmission system of the paging information performs a manner of transmitting paging information.
  • the manner in which the corresponding network element performs the transmission of the paging information in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 is the same, and is also used to perform the operations in FIG. 1 to FIG. 3, FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 in this embodiment.
  • the method for transmitting paging information provided by any of the embodiments is provided with a corresponding physical device, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first communication node 10 is configured with the transmission device 300 of the paging information in any of the foregoing embodiments shown in FIG. 11, and each of the second communication nodes 20 is configured with any of the foregoing FIG.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a manner in which three second communication nodes 20 are included in a transmission system of paging information, and each network element in the transmission system of the paging information performs a manner of transmitting paging information. Similar to the manner in which the corresponding network element performs the transmission of the paging information in the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 11 and FIG.
  • the transmission method has a corresponding physical device, and its implementation principle and technical effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the discontinuous reception period T DRX of the second communication node is as shown in FIG. 15 , which is a schematic diagram of a T DRX in the method for transmitting paging information provided by the embodiment, where the T DRX is a non-second of the second communication node.
  • the continuous receiving period is also the time interval at which the second communication node listens for paging information.
  • the period may be a value configured on the network side (for example, sent to the second communication node by using a system broadcast message or other RRC signaling), or may be set by the second communication node according to requirements, if it is set by the second communication node, It is necessary to feed back the set period value to the first communication node on the network side and calculate the input parameters of the PO as both parties.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a T DRX in the method for transmitting paging information provided by the embodiment, where the T DRX is a non-second of the second communication node.
  • the continuous receiving period is also the
  • This second communication node will wake up every 320ms and listen to whether it has its own paging information.
  • Paging transmission interval T paging of the first communication node a time interval at which the first communication node transmits paging information;
  • the transmission of paging information is performed within 20 ms.
  • Each transmission of paging information refers to repeatedly transmitting paging information on a group of paging resources. This group of paging resources corresponds to all ports, and complete coverage of paging information is completed.
  • the set of paging resources may correspond to the SS burst set resource in FIG. 2, that is, multiplexed with each SS in each SS block, or preset a set of scan resources.
  • the second communication node identifier Device_ID the identifier of the second type of communication node, where the UE identifier (UE_ID) is used as an example.
  • the UE identifier may be all of the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) or Part of the field, uniquely identifies a UE in the whole network or in the entire area. Other logos are not limited.
  • IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
  • Quasi-common position QCL similar to the quasi co-located in LTE.
  • the channel or signal-related large-scale information of one resource can be correlated by another channel or signal.
  • the large-scale information is derived.
  • the first type of communication node sends an indication including the quasi-co-location relationship information to the second type of communication node, for example, a paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels.
  • Quasi-common positional relationship information or the system pre-defines the positional relationship information between the paging information related signal and other scanning signals or channels.
  • the quasi-common position relationship information includes: a signal or channel information having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signal, and a port number or/and a resource of the paging information related signal and a port number or/and of the other scanning signal or channel.
  • the mapping relationship of resources is described in this mapping relationship of resources.
  • the second type communication node before receiving the paging information related signal, can determine the receiving manner of the paging information related signal by measuring or receiving the signal or channel having a quasi-co-position relationship with the paging information related signal.
  • the receiving mode refers to a resource for receiving paging information, and a receiving beam or port, that is, which resource of the paging occasion (a group of paging resources) corresponding to the paging information related signal is used by the second type of communication node. Receive paging information related signals.
  • the quasi-co-location relationship information described above may be that the first type of communication node sends to all of the second type of communication nodes through a broadcast message, or through radio resource control (RRC) with the second type of communication node.
  • Dedicated signaling is sent to the second type of communication node.
  • the above other scanning signals or channels include one or more of the following signals or channels: synchronization signal (SS), demodulation reference signal of physical broadcast channel (PBCH), beam reference signal (BRS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS) ), mobility reference signal MRS), channel status indication reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • the synchronization signal is carried by the SS burst set scanning resource shown in FIG. 2, and the SS is sent in a specific port/port group in each SS block, and SS and paging can be defined.
  • the quasi-co-location relationship of the information-related signals, the channel information of the SS received in the SS block can be used to receive paging information on the paging resource corresponding to the block.
  • the SS burst set may further include a PBCH.
  • the PBCH demodulation reference signal may also be used to define a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging related signal; similarly, the BRS is a reference signal corresponding to a different beam/port; The MRS is a reference signal corresponding to the mobility measurement of the second communication node, and is used to determine whether beam/TRP/cell reselection or handover occurs.
  • the CSI-RS is used by the terminal to measure channel states of different ports/beam directions. These signals or channels can also be configured to have a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging information related signals.
  • T DRX is an integer multiple of T paging .
  • Sub-implementation example 1-1
  • T paging T SS
  • T paging 2
  • the length of the frames, the starting point of the SS burst set, the radio frame number SFN satisfies SFN mod 2 0; at this time, the SS burst set and the PO completely coincide at the beginning of the period and the time domain, and the transmission of the paging information can be completely reused in the SS.
  • SFN mod 2 0
  • the base station determines to send paging information to the terminal with the UE_ID of 0000001101, and the base station first calculates the starting wireless frame number of the PO belonging to the terminal. Determine the starting wireless frame number using the following formula:
  • the base station uses the radio frame that satisfies the above formula as a starting point, and sends paging information to the terminal in the SS burst set corresponding to the radio frame.
  • the resource for transmitting the paging information is related to the scanning resource of the SS burst set.
  • FIG. 18 it is a schematic structural diagram of the PO of the terminal in the sub-implementation example 1-1 shown in FIG.
  • the SS bursts occupy the first subframe of the radio frames 26, 27, that is, the subframe 0.
  • Each SS burst contains m SS blocks, and the base station will send the same paging information to the terminal in each SS block with its specific port or beam.
  • the paging information is multiplexed with the synchronization signal and other signals in each SS block, and the multiplexing mode may be TDM or FDM.
  • the terminal calculates its own PO by the same formula, and monitors whether there is any paging information belonging to itself when each PO arrives.
  • the base station configures a QCL relationship between the paging information and the synchronization signal to the terminal, that is, the paging information and the synchronization signal are quasi-co-located, and A mapping relationship is given between the paging resource and the synchronization signal transmission resource.
  • the SS block index is used to represent the synchronization signal transmission resource, and correspondingly, the paging resource is represented by an index of a paging block (possibly multiplexed SS block).
  • the terminal wakes up from the sleep state in advance, and measures or receives the scan signal channel transmitted by the base station and has a QCL relationship with the paging information.
  • the terminal sequentially receives the synchronization signals sent by the base station through different transmit antenna ports by using different receiving antenna ports, and the terminal obtains multiple sets of measurement results, and each set of results corresponds to one of its own receiving antenna ports and one base station side.
  • the transmitting antenna port uses the receiving antenna port corresponding to the group with the strongest signal strength among the plurality of sets of measurement results as the antenna port used for receiving the paging message.
  • the terminal may receive the paging information sent by the base station by using the predetermined specific receiving antenna port.
  • the terminal obtains the preferred downlink receiving antenna port as the receiving antenna port 4 through training.
  • the terminal will only receive the paging message by receiving antenna port 4, and no longer in different paging. The timing switches the receiving antenna port.
  • the terminal downlink receiving antenna port training process it can simultaneously identify the downlink preferred transmit antenna port/preferred transmit beam direction of the base station side, that is, the base station side transmit antenna corresponding to the group with the strongest signal strength among the multiple sets of measurement results. port.
  • the terminal can reduce the number of times of receiving the paging, that is, the synchronization signal block corresponding to the preferred transmit antenna port only in the downlink.
  • the paging is received within the SS block.
  • the training obtains a preferred downlink transmit antenna port of the base station (the corresponding paging resource is SS block 3) relative to the terminal, and the preferred downlink receive antenna port of the terminal is port 4.
  • the terminal will only Receive antenna port 4 receives the page in SS block 3.
  • the signal or channel having a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging may also be one of: a Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS), a Beam Reference Signal (BRS), a Mobility Reference Signal (MRS), a channel. Status indication reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • BRS Beam Reference Signal
  • MRS Mobility Reference Signal
  • CSI-RS Status indication reference signal
  • the manner in which the terminal uses the quasi-co-location relationship indication information to determine the paging resource in the PO is the same as the embodiment.
  • Sub-implementation example 1-2
  • T paging T SS
  • T paging 2 radio frames (radio)
  • the length of the frames, the starting point of the SS burst set, the radio frame number SFN satisfies SFN mod 2 1; at this time, the SS burst set and the PO do not coincide at the beginning of the period and the time domain, and the transmission of the paging information is not multiplexed.
  • the base station determines that paging information is to be transmitted to the terminal whose UE_ID is 0000001101, and the base station first calculates the starting radio frame number of the PO belonging to the terminal. Determine the starting wireless frame number using the following formula:
  • the difference from the sub-implementation example 1-1 is that, at this time, the start radio frame of the PO is not the same as the SS burst set start radio frame. Therefore, the paging information is not multiplexed with the synchronization signal in the SS burst set, but independently forms a scanning resource, such as a paging burst set.
  • the other technical features of the sub-implementation example 1-2 are the same as those of the sub-implementation example 1-1, and are not described herein again.
  • Sub-implementation example 1-3
  • the transmission can be multiplexed in part of the SS burst set, that is, there is a part of the SS burst set that does not multiplex paging information, and another part of the SS burst set multiplexes paging information.
  • the base station determines that paging information is to be transmitted to the terminal whose UE_ID is 0000001101, and the base station first calculates the starting radio frame number of the PO belonging to the terminal. Determine the starting wireless frame number using the following formula:
  • the difference from the sub-implementation example 1-1 is that, at this time, the SS burst set scan resources corresponding to the start radio frame 26 of the PO are different, as shown in FIG. 21, which is the terminal in the sub-implementation examples 1-3 shown in FIG.
  • the structure diagram of the PO, the SS burst set in FIG. 21 refers to the time domain length including one radio frame, and includes an SS burst, which is mapped on the subframe 0.
  • the terminal After calculating the starting wireless frame number of the PO, the terminal will monitor the paging information in the sub-frame 0 of the frame 26.
  • the base station determines that paging information is to be transmitted to the UE1 whose UE_ID is 0000001101, and the base station first calculates the starting radio frame number of the PO belonging to the UE1. Determine the starting wireless frame number using the following formula:
  • the starting radio frame of the PO of UE1 is frame26, and does not coincide with the SS burst set starting radio frame. Therefore, a set of scanning resources is added in this PO.
  • the base station determines to transmit paging information to UE2 with UE_ID 0000001110, and the base station calculates the starting wireless frame number of the PO belonging to the UE2. Determine the starting wireless frame number using the following formula:
  • the starting radio frame of the PO of UE2 is frame 28, which coincides with the SS burst set starting radio frame. Therefore, the SS burst set resource transmission can be multiplexed in this PO. But this PO has the same duration as the SS burst set, which is 4 radio frames. That is, as shown in FIG. 23, it is a schematic structural diagram of a PO of the terminal in the sub-implementation examples 1-4 shown in FIG.
  • the duration of each PO is 40 ms, and a part of the PO burst set and SS burst set time domain resources are completely matched (for example, the PO burst set0, PO burst set2 and other starting radio frames are the same PO burst set as the SS burst set starting radio frame).
  • the SS burst set resource can be reused, and the other part is PO burst.
  • the set does not match the SS burst set time domain resource (for example, PO burst set1, PO burst set3, etc.), and the SS burst set resource cannot be multiplexed for these POs.
  • the time domain resources occupied by different PO burst sets are not the same.
  • PO burst set0 and PO burst set1 occupy radio frames 2 and 3, but both occupy The sub-frame resources can be different.
  • the SS burst set resource may not be multiplexed, as shown in FIG. 24, which is another PO of the terminal in the sub-implementation examples 1-4 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 24 is another PO of the terminal in the sub-implementation examples 1-4 shown in FIG.
  • the number of times N, when there is a multiple relationship between T DRX and T paging , N T DRX / T paging . Therefore, the role of the two formulas is equivalent, the only difference is that the parameters configured on the network side are different.
  • T DRX is an integer multiple of T paging
  • T paging is greater than or equal to the radio frame length.
  • the base station and the terminal can calculate the starting radio frame number of the PO by the following formula:
  • the base station determines to send paging information to the terminal with the UE_ID of 0000001101, and the base station first calculates the starting wireless frame number of the PO belonging to the terminal. Determine the starting wireless frame number using the following formula:
  • the formula for calculating the radio frame number of the paging start point may also be:
  • T DRX is an integer multiple of T paging
  • T paging is greater than or equal to the radio frame length.
  • the base station and the terminal can calculate the starting radio frame number of the PO by the following formula:
  • Each radio frame will correspond to two POs. After determining the starting radio frame number, it is also determined whether the PO of the terminal is in the first half or the second half, that is, the starting subframe position.
  • the base station determines to send paging information to the terminal with the UE_ID of 0000001101, and the base station first calculates the starting wireless frame number of the PO belonging to the terminal. Determine the starting wireless frame number using the following formula:
  • the starting subframe position of the starting wireless frame number of the PO of this terminal is determined according to the UE_ID.
  • the last bit 0 and 1 of the UE_ID are used to correspond to the subframe 0 and the subframe 5 respectively.
  • the UE_ID is 1 at the end, and the start subframe corresponding to the terminal is the subframe 5. That is, the shaded portion of Fig. 26 is the paging occasion of the terminal.
  • the base station sends paging information to the terminal on the paging resource corresponding to the sub-frame 5 of the frame 6.
  • the terminal calculates the PO in the same way and receives the paging information.
  • the formula for calculating the radio frame number of the paging start point may also be:
  • the PO determination parameter configured by the base station does not include the paging interval T paging , but the number N of paging messages sent in the T DRX .
  • N T DRX / T paging .
  • the base station and the terminal can adopt the following formula. Calculate the starting wireless frame number of the PO:
  • the formula includes two rounding operations in the example 2 and the embodiment 3.
  • the base station determines the starting subframe number of the PO of the terminal according to a predefined rule.
  • the terminal also determines the starting subframe number of the PO according to a predefined rule.
  • the formula for calculating the radio frame number of the paging start point in the present embodiment may also be:
  • the PO determination parameter configured by the base station does not include the paging interval T paging , but the number N of paging messages sent in the T DRX , when there is no multiple relationship between T DRX and T paging , Therefore, the role of the two formulas is equivalent, the only difference is that the parameters configured on the network side are different.
  • the present embodiment describes a method of calculating a starting radio frame number of a PO using a UE_ID, and introducing a PO offset t offset in a calculation formula to adjust a starting radio frame position of the PO.
  • a PO offset t offset is introduced in this embodiment example.
  • T paging is greater than the radio frame length by 10 ms, and there is a multiple relationship between T DRX and T paging . According to whether the location of the radio frame of the SS burst set matches the starting radio frame position of the PO, the following sub-examples are Detailed description:
  • T paging As shown in FIG. 27, a relationship between T paging and T SS is provided in the embodiment 5-1.
  • T DRX 32, that is, 32 radio frame lengths
  • the transmission of paging information can be completely multiplexed in the SS burst set.
  • t offset 0, that is, no additional offset is introduced.
  • the base station determines to send paging information to the terminal with the UE_ID of 0000001101, and the base station first calculates the starting wireless frame number of the PO belonging to the terminal. Determine the starting wireless frame number using the following formula:
  • the starting wireless frame of the PO is determined, and the paging information can be multiplexed with the SS burst set resource.
  • the base station After determining the starting point radio frame of the PO, the base station sends the paging information, and the terminal calculates the starting point radio frame of the PO in the same manner, and the manner of receiving the paging information is the same as that of the sub-implementation example 1-1 of the first embodiment. I will not repeat them here.
  • T SS T paging
  • T paging when T SS and T paging are other multiples or a divisor relationship, as shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, as long as the PO start frame radio frame overlaps with the SS burst set start radio frame.
  • the value of t offset can be 0, that is, the location of the radio frame of the PO is not required to be adjusted, and the paging information can be reused as much as possible.
  • Sub-implementation example 5-2
  • the length of the radio frames, the starting frame radio frame number of the SS burst set satisfies SFN mod 2 1; at this time, the SS burst set and the PO do not coincide at the beginning of the period and the time domain, and the t offset is introduced to adjust the starting point of the PO.
  • the frame position such that the transmission of paging information is multiplexed within the SS burst set.
  • the base station determines that paging information is to be transmitted to the terminal whose UE_ID is 0000001101, and the base station first calculates the starting radio frame number of the PO belonging to the terminal. Determine the starting wireless frame number using the following formula:
  • the position of frame0, 2, 4, 6, etc. in FIG. 28 is the radio frame number before the start of the radio frame adjustment of the PO, and the backward radio frame of the PO is adjusted to be the same as the SS burst set starting radio frame by the backward offset of t offset (ie, frame1, 3, 5, 7, etc.), therefore, the paging information and the synchronization signal are multiplexed in the SS burst set.
  • the method for the subsequent base station to send the paging information and the terminal to receive the paging information is the same as the sub-implementation example 1-1 of the first embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • T SS T paging
  • T SS and T paging are other multiples or divisors, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 , as long as the PO start frame radio frame is offset from the SS burst set start radio frame
  • the offset can be taken as the corresponding offset, that is, by adjusting the starting wireless frame position of the PO, paging the SS burst set resource as much as possible; wherein, FIG. 29 is provided by the embodiment 5-2.
  • T T SS schematic, exemplary embodiments book 30 is provided a further 5-2 showing the relationship of paging and T SS T.
  • the base station and the terminal can calculate the starting wireless frame number of the PO by the following formula:
  • the base station determines to send paging information to the terminal with the UE_ID of 0000001101, and the base station first calculates the starting wireless frame number of the PO belonging to the terminal. Determine the starting wireless frame number using the following formula:
  • the formula for calculating the radio frame number of the paging start point may also be:
  • the base station and the terminal can calculate the starting radio frame number of the PO by the following formula:
  • T DRX 32
  • T paging 0.5, that is, the transmission interval of the base station side of the paging information is 5 ms.
  • each radio frame will correspond to two POs, and then the starting wireless frame number is determined. After that, it is also determined whether the PO of the terminal is in the first half frame or the second half frame, that is, the starting subframe number.
  • the paging start radio frame coincides with the SS burst set starting radio frame, and the t offset is configured to be 0.
  • the base station determines to send paging information to the terminal with the UE_ID of 0000001101, and the base station first calculates the starting wireless frame number of the PO belonging to the terminal. Determine the starting wireless frame number using the following formula:
  • the starting subframe position of the PO of this terminal is determined according to the UE_ID.
  • the last bit 0 and 1 of the UE_ID are used to correspond to the subframe 0 and the subframe 5 respectively.
  • the UE_ID is 1 at the end, and the start subframe corresponding to the terminal is the subframe 5. That is, the hatched portion of FIG. 25 is the paging occasion of the terminal.
  • the base station sends paging information to the terminal on the paging resource corresponding to the sub-frame 5 of the frame 6, and the terminal calculates the PO by the same method and receives the paging information.
  • the formula for calculating the starting wireless frame number of the PO may also be:
  • the PO determination parameter configured by the base station does not include the paging interval T paging , but the number N of paging messages sent in the T DRX .
  • N T DRX / T paging .
  • the t offset may be set according to the actual offset between the pre-radio frame number of the PO and the start of the SS burst set radio frame, and configured for the terminal.
  • the base station and the terminal can adopt the following formula. Calculate the starting wireless frame number of the PO:
  • the formula includes both the rounding down operators in the implementation example 6 and the implementation example 7.
  • the base station determines the starting subframe number of the PO of the terminal according to a predefined rule.
  • the terminal also determines the starting subframe number of the PO according to a predefined rule.
  • the formula for calculating the radio frame number of the paging start point in the present embodiment may also be:
  • the PO determination parameter configured by the base station does not include the paging interval T paging , but the number N of paging messages sent in the T DRX , when there is no multiple relationship between T DRX and T paging , Therefore, the role of the two formulas is equivalent, the only difference is that the parameters configured on the network side are different.
  • the t offset may be set according to the actual offset between the pre-radio frame number of the PO and the start of the SS burst set radio frame, and configured for the terminal.
  • T SS 2 that is, 20 ms, according to different values of T paging , and whether paging information is multiplexed in the SS burst set, is divided into the following sub-examples for detailed description:
  • T paging is a period in which the base station sends the paging information, and is not required to be configured to the terminal in the method corresponding to the sub-implementation example, and the base station implements different t offsets for the terminal.
  • the terminal is distributed in different POs and the SS burst set resources can be reused.
  • the base station determines the starting wireless frame number by the following formula:
  • the unicast may be a dedicated RRC signaling to notify; in the multicast mode, corresponding to a group of terminals of the same PO location, the base station allocates the same group identifier (such as G-RNTI, Group RNTI), and will page.
  • the timing offset is scrambled by the G-RNTI, and the terminal uses the G-RNTI to descramble the configuration information, and the terminal in the same group obtains the corresponding t offset configuration.
  • the base station sends paging information to the terminal in the corresponding PO, and the terminal receives paging information in the corresponding PO.
  • all the 16 POs may not be configured to the terminal, and some POs without the terminal may not send the paging information at the location where the terminal is not configured. .
  • the number of configured terminals in each PO is also variable, and the principle of terminal grouping is not limited here.
  • the base station can also configure t offset to realize that the paging information and the SS burst set are not reused at all.
  • the paging information does not reuse the SS burst set resource, but uses a new set of scanning resources.
  • FIG. 34 it is a schematic diagram of a relationship between T paging and T SS provided in the embodiment 9-3.
  • the paging information transmission can be multiplexed in the partial SS burst set, that is, It is said that there is a part of the SS burst set that does not multiplex the paging information, and another part of the SS burst set multiplexes the paging information.
  • the paging information is multiplexed in the SS burst set of the even index.
  • part of the paging information transmission can be multiplexed in the SS burst set, that is, all SS bursts
  • the paging information is multiplexed in the set.
  • the transmission of a part of the paging information needs to add another scanning resource.
  • PO 0 , PO 2 , ..., PO 14 can reuse SS burst set resources, and PO 1 , PO 3 , ..., PO 15 respectively add a set of scanning resources.
  • FIG. 36 it is a schematic structural diagram of a PO of a terminal in Embodiment 10, in this embodiment, a synchronization signal and a paging information related signal have a quasi-co-location relationship, and both adopt the same scanning resource, and the terminal passes The specific way has determined the time domain location of its own PO.
  • This embodiment describes a method for a terminal to determine a paging resource in a PO according to quasi-co-location relationship information and measurement of a synchronization signal.
  • the base station configures, to the terminal, a quasi-coordination positional relationship (QCL relationship) information between the paging information related signal (such as a demodulation reference signal of the paging control related physical control channel) and the synchronization signal, that is, a demodulation reference signal of the paging DCI.
  • the synchronization signal is quasi-co-located, and a mapping relationship is given between the paging resource and the synchronization signal transmission resource.
  • the quasi-co-location (QCL) relationship information may be sent by the base station to all terminals through a broadcast message, or may be sent to the terminal through RRC dedicated signaling with the terminal.
  • the resources of the two are one-to-one mapping
  • the SS block index is used to represent the synchronization signal transmission resource.
  • the paging resource is also represented by the index of the SS block.
  • the terminal wakes up from the sleep state in advance, and measures or receives the scan signal or channel sent by the base station in a quasi-co-position relationship with the paging information related signal.
  • the terminal sequentially receives the synchronization signals sent by the base station through different transmit antenna ports by using different receiving antenna ports, and the terminal will obtain multiple sets of measurement results, and each set of results corresponds to one of its own receiving antenna ports and one base station.
  • the antenna port is used as the antenna port for receiving the paging information by the corresponding receiving antenna port corresponding to the group with the strongest signal strength among the plurality of measurement results.
  • the terminal may receive the paging information sent by the base station by using the predetermined specific receiving antenna port.
  • the terminal obtains a preferred downlink receiving antenna port as the receiving antenna port 4 through training, and when the PO arrives, the terminal will only receive the paging message by the receiving antenna port 4, and no longer in different paging.
  • the timing switches the receiving antenna port.
  • the terminal downlink receiving antenna port training process it can simultaneously identify the downlink preferred transmit antenna port/preferred transmit beam direction of the base station side, that is, the base station side transmit antenna corresponding to the group with the strongest signal strength among the multiple sets of measurement results. port. If the system pre-defines the time-frequency domain resource location of the transmit antenna port (such as the SS block index of 3) and the paging resource of the corresponding transmit antenna port (ie, a specific paging resource in the PO, that is, SS block 3) In the case of the mapping relationship, the terminal can reduce the number of times the paging information is received when the PO arrives, that is, the paging is received only in the synchronization signal block SS block corresponding to the downlink preferred transmitting antenna port.
  • the time-frequency domain resource location of the transmit antenna port such as the SS block index of 3
  • the paging resource of the corresponding transmit antenna port ie, a specific paging resource in the PO, that is, SS block 3
  • the terminal can reduce the
  • the training obtains a preferred downlink transmit antenna port of the base station (the corresponding paging resource is SS block 3) relative to the terminal, and the preferred downlink receive antenna port of the UE is port 4.
  • the terminal will only Receive antenna port 4 receives the page in SS block 3.
  • the other scan signal or channel having a quasi-co-position relationship with the paging information related signal may also be one or more of the following: a Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS), a Beam Reference Signal (BRS), and a mobile A reference signal (MRS), a channel state indication reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • BRS Beam Reference Signal
  • MRS mobile A reference signal
  • CSI-RS channel state indication reference signal
  • FIG. 37 it is a schematic structural diagram of a PO of a terminal in the eleventh embodiment.
  • a synchronization signal and a paging information related signal have a quasi-co-location relationship, and the two adopt different scanning resources, and the terminal passes The specific way has determined the time domain location of its own PO.
  • This embodiment describes a method for a terminal to determine a paging resource in a PO according to quasi-co-location relationship information and measurement of a synchronization signal.
  • the base station configures, to the terminal, a quasi-coherent positional relationship (QCL relationship) information between the paging information related signal (such as a demodulation reference signal of the paging message) and the synchronization signal, that is, the demodulation reference signal and the synchronization signal of the paging message are A common location, and a mapping relationship between a resource of a paging message and a synchronization signal transmission resource.
  • the quasi-co-location (QCL) relationship information may be sent by the base station to all terminals through a broadcast message, or may be sent to the terminal through RRC dedicated signaling with the terminal.
  • the two resources are many-to-one mapping: the two synchronization signal resources correspond to the resources of one paging message, that is, the ports in the paging block 0 and the ports of the SS blocks 0 and 1 are quasi-co-located.
  • the SS block index is still used to represent the synchronization signal transmission resource, and accordingly, the source of the paging message is represented by the index of the paging block.
  • the terminal wakes up from the sleep state in advance, and measures or receives the scan signal channel sent by the base station and has a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging message.
  • the terminal sequentially receives the synchronization signals sent by the base station through different transmit antenna ports by using different receiving antenna ports, and the terminal obtains multiple sets of measurement results, and each set of results corresponds to one of its own receiving antenna ports and one base station side.
  • the transmitting antenna port uses the receiving antenna port corresponding to the group with the strongest signal strength among the plurality of sets of measurement results as the antenna port used for receiving the paging message.
  • the terminal can receive the paging message sent by the base station with the specific receiving antenna port determined in advance.
  • the terminal obtains a preferred downlink receiving antenna port as the receiving antenna port 4 through training, and when the PO arrives, the terminal will only receive the paging message by the receiving antenna port 4, and no longer in different paging.
  • the timing switches the receiving antenna port.
  • the terminal downlink receiving antenna port training process it can simultaneously identify the downlink preferred transmit antenna port/preferred transmit beam direction of the base station side, that is, the base station side transmit antenna corresponding to the group with the strongest signal strength among the multiple sets of measurement results. port. If the base station indicates the mapping between the time-frequency domain resource location of the transmit antenna port (eg, the SS block index is 3) and the paging resource of the corresponding transmit antenna port (ie, the paging resource of one of the POs, ie, paging block 1) In the relationship, the terminal can reduce the number of times the paging message is received when the PO arrives, that is, the paging message is received only in the paging block 1 corresponding to the downlink preferred transmitting antenna port.
  • the base station indicates the mapping between the time-frequency domain resource location of the transmit antenna port (eg, the SS block index is 3) and the paging resource of the corresponding transmit antenna port (ie, the paging resource of one of the POs, ie, paging
  • the training obtains a preferred downlink transmit antenna port of the base station (the corresponding paging resource is SS block 3) relative to the terminal, and the preferred downlink receive antenna port of the UE is port 4.
  • the terminal When the PO arrives, the terminal will only Receive antenna port 4 receives the page in paging block 1.
  • the other scan signal or channel having a quasi-co-position relationship with the paging information related signal may also be one or more of the following: a Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS), a Beam Reference Signal (BRS), and a mobile A reference signal (MRS), a channel state indication reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • BRS Beam Reference Signal
  • MRS mobile A reference signal
  • CSI-RS channel state indication reference signal
  • FIG. 38 it is a schematic structural diagram of a PO of a terminal in Embodiment 12, in this embodiment, a synchronization signal and a paging information related signal have a quasi-co-location relationship, and the two adopt different scanning resources, and the terminal passes The specific way has determined the time domain location of its own PO.
  • This embodiment describes a method for a terminal to determine a paging resource in a PO according to quasi-co-location relationship information and measurement of a synchronization signal.
  • the base station configures the QCL relationship information between the paging information related signal and the synchronization signal to the terminal, that is, the demodulation reference signal and the synchronization signal of the paging message are quasi-co-located, and the resources of the paging message are A mapping relationship is given between the synchronization signal transmission resources.
  • the quasi-co-location relationship information may be sent by the base station to all terminals through a broadcast message, or may be sent to the terminal through RRC dedicated signaling with the terminal.
  • the two resources are one-to-many mapping: one synchronization signal resource corresponds to the resources of two paging messages, that is, the ports in SS block 0 are approximately the same as the ports of paging blocks 0 and 1.
  • the SS block index is still used to represent the synchronization signal transmission resource.
  • the paging resource is represented by the index of the paging block.
  • the terminal wakes up from the sleep state in advance, and measures or receives the scan signal channel sent by the base station and has a quasi-co-location relationship with the paging message.
  • the terminal sequentially receives the synchronization signals sent by the base station through different transmit antenna ports by using different receiving antenna ports, and the terminal obtains multiple sets of measurement results, and each set of results corresponds to one of its own receiving antenna ports and one base station side.
  • the transmitting antenna port uses the receiving antenna port corresponding to the group with the strongest signal strength among the plurality of sets of measurement results as the antenna port used for receiving the paging message.
  • the terminal can receive the paging message sent by the base station by using the predetermined specific receiving antenna port.
  • the terminal obtains a preferred downlink receiving antenna port as the receiving antenna port 4 through training, and when the PO arrives, the terminal will only receive the paging message by the receiving antenna port 4, and no longer in different paging.
  • the timing switches the receiving antenna port.
  • the terminal downlink receiving antenna port training process it can simultaneously identify the downlink preferred transmit antenna port/preferred transmit beam direction of the base station side, that is, the base station side transmit antenna corresponding to the group with the strongest signal strength among the multiple sets of measurement results. port. If the base station indicates the time-frequency domain resource location of the transmit antenna port (eg, SS block index is 1) and the paging resource of the corresponding transmit antenna port (paging resources of two of the POs, namely paging blocks 2 and 3) In the mapping relationship, when the PO arrives, the terminal can reduce the number of times the paging message is received, that is, the paging message is received only in the paging blocks 2 and 3 corresponding to the downlink preferred transmitting antenna port.
  • the base station indicates the time-frequency domain resource location of the transmit antenna port (eg, SS block index is 1) and the paging resource of the corresponding transmit antenna port (paging resources of two of the POs, namely paging blocks 2 and 3)
  • the terminal can reduce the number of times the
  • the training obtains a preferred downlink transmit antenna port of the base station (the corresponding paging resource is SS block 1) relative to the terminal, and the preferred downlink receive antenna port of the UE is port 4.
  • the terminal will only Receive antenna port 4 receives the paging in paging blocks 2, 3.
  • the other scan signal or channel having a quasi-co-position relationship with the paging information related signal may also be one or more of the following: a Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS), a Beam Reference Signal (BRS), and a mobile A reference signal (MRS), a channel state indication reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • BRS Beam Reference Signal
  • MRS mobile A reference signal
  • CSI-RS channel state indication reference signal
  • the paging information related signal refers to a demodulation reference signal of paging downlink control information (paging DCI), and/or a demodulation reference signal of a paging message; when paging downlink control information and When the paging message uses independent scanning resources, the base station may also indicate to the terminal the quasi-co-location relationship between the demodulation reference signal of the paging downlink control information and the demodulation reference signal of the paging message. The terminal can determine the resource of the paging message according to the received resource of the paging downlink control information and the quasi-co-location relationship, and receive the paging message. As shown in FIG.
  • the PO in FIG. 39 includes a group of paging resources, which include paging downlink control information in each beam direction (can be combined with SS).
  • the SS burst set resource is multiplexed, or a set of scanning resources are independently configured, and the paging message independently configures a set of scanning resources.
  • the quasi-coordinate position relationship between the paging downlink control information and the paging message is one.
  • a corresponding resource map Similar to the implementation example 11 and the implementation example 12, a many-to-one or one-to-many resource mapping relationship can also be configured.
  • the base station informs the terminal of the scan signal or channel having the quasi-coordinate position relationship with the paging information related signal by explicit signaling, or indicates the paging information related signal ( a quasi-co-location relationship between the demodulation reference signal of the physical control channel of the paging information and the demodulation reference signal associated with the paging information, and indicating a mapping relationship between each paging resource and each of the scanning channel resources (or each).
  • the mapping relationship between the paging control related physical control channel resources and each paging message resource may also pre-define the relationship information, for example, the system pre-defined paging information related signal and the beam reference signal BRS (or paging)
  • the demodulation reference signal of the information-related physical control channel and the paging message demodulation reference signal have a quasi-co-location relationship, and the mapping relationship between the transmission resource of the paging information related signal and the synchronization signal resource (or each paging information is related)
  • the embodiment further provides a computer readable storage medium storing computer executable instructions for performing any of the above methods.
  • the base station includes: a processor 4010 and a memory 4020; and may also include a communication interface (Communications). Interface) 4030 and bus 4040.
  • a communication interface Common Language (Communications). Interface) 4030 and bus 4040.
  • the processor 4010, the memory 4020, and the communication interface 4030 can complete communication with each other through the bus 4040.
  • Communication interface 4030 can be used for information transfer.
  • the processor 4010 can invoke logic instructions in the memory 4020 to perform the corresponding methods provided by the above-described embodiments.
  • FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram showing the hardware structure of a terminal device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 41, the terminal device includes: one or more processors 4110 and a memory 4120. A processor 4110 is taken as an example in FIG.
  • the terminal device may further include: an input device 4130 and an output device 4140.
  • the processor 4110, the memory 4120, the input device 4130, and the output device 4140 in the terminal device may be connected by a bus or other means, and the bus connection is taken as an example in FIG.
  • the input device 4130 can receive input numeric or character information
  • the output device 4140 can include a display device such as a display screen.
  • the terminal device can also include a communication device 4150 for transmitting information over the communication network.
  • the processor 4110 can invoke logic instructions in the memory 4120 to perform the corresponding methods provided by the above embodiments.
  • Each of the above-described memory 4020 and memory 4120 may include a storage program area and a storage data area, and the storage program area may store an operating system and an application required for at least one function.
  • the storage data area can store data and the like created according to the use of the device.
  • the memory may include, for example, a volatile memory of a random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory. For example, at least one disk storage device, flash memory device, or other non-transitory solid state storage device.
  • the logic instructions in memory 4020 and memory 4120 described above can be implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as separate products, the logic instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present disclosure may be embodied in the form of a computer software product, which may be stored in a storage medium, and includes a plurality of instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, a network device, etc.) All or part of the steps of the method described in this embodiment are performed.
  • the storage medium may be a non-transitory storage medium or a transitory storage medium.
  • the non-transitory storage medium may include: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program codes. medium.
  • All or part of the processes in the foregoing embodiment may be completed by a computer program indicating related hardware, and the program may be stored in a non-transitory computer readable storage medium, and when the program is executed, may include the above The flow of an embodiment of the method.
  • All or part of the above steps may be performed by a program to instruct related hardware (eg, a processor), which may be stored in a computer readable storage medium such as a read only memory, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
  • a program to instruct related hardware eg, a processor
  • a computer readable storage medium such as a read only memory, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
  • all or part of the steps of the above embodiments may also be implemented using one or more integrated circuits.
  • each module or unit in the foregoing embodiment may be implemented in the form of hardware, for example, by implementing an integrated circuit to implement its corresponding function, or may be implemented in the form of a software function module, for example, being executed by a processor and stored in a memory. Programs/instructions to implement their respective functions.
  • the embodiments in this application are not limited to any specific form of combination of hardware and software.
  • the method, device and system for transmitting paging information can solve the problem that a method for receiving paging information by using a DRX mechanism in an LTE system is applied to a new generation wireless communication system, and a UE in an IDLE state cannot predict a beam or a port.
  • the scheduling of different time slots causes the method of transmitting paging information through the DRX mechanism to be very complicated and difficult to implement.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Probability & Statistics with Applications (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

一种寻呼信息的传输方法、装置及系统。所述方法包括：第一通信节点计算第二通信节点的寻呼时机PO的时域位置；第一通信节点在时域位置对应的PO内向第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，寻呼信息包括以下至少一项：寻呼下行控制信息、寻呼消息；其中，PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输。

Description

寻呼信息的传输方法、装置及系统 技术领域
本公开涉及无线通信技术领域，例如涉及一种寻呼信息的传输方法、装置及系统。
背景技术
随着无线电技术的不断进步，多种多样的无线电业务大量涌现，而无线电业务所依托的频谱资源是有限的，面对人们对带宽需求的不断增加，商业通信主要使用的300兆赫兹(MHz)～3吉赫兹(GHz)之间频谱资源表现出极为紧张的局面，已经无法满足未来无线通信的需求。
在新一代无线通信中，将会采用比第四代无线通信(the 4th Generation Mobile Communication，4G)系统所采用的载波频率更高的载波频率进行通信，例如采用28GHz、45GHz或70GHz等等，这种高频信道具有自由传播损耗较大，容易被氧气吸收，受雨衰影响大等缺点，严重影响了高频通信系统的覆盖性能。但是，由于高频通信对应的载波频率具有更短的波长，所以可以保证单位面积上能容纳更多的天线元素，而更多的天线元素意味着可以采用波束赋形的方法来提高天线增益，从而保证高频通信的覆盖性能。
采用波束赋形的方法后，发射端可以将发射能量集中在一个方向上，而在其它方向上能量很小或者没有，也就是说，每个波束具有自身的方向性，每个波束只能覆盖到一定方向上的终端，发射端(例如基站)需要发射多个波束才能完成全方位覆盖。在新一代无线通信系统中，特别是应用在较高频段时，波束赋形技术的应用使得单一发射端口的覆盖范围局限在很小的角度内，此时，网络侧将无法获知空闲(IDLE)状态的用户设备(User Equipment，UE)在哪个波束或端口下，与低频段小区级寻呼消息发送机制相比，若要确保对每个UE潜在位置的覆盖，则需要全波束的重复发送寻呼信息，即网络侧发射更多的寻呼信息，以确保要对每一个波束方向或端口下的UE均有机会接收到指定的寻呼信息。由于基站射频链数量的限制，基站在不同波束方向或端口上通过时分复用的方式发射寻呼信息，在基于波束传输的系统中，不同子帧或时隙的波束方向是基于业务灵活配置的。若采用相关的系统，例如长期演进(Long Term  Evolution，：LTE)系统的寻呼机制，需要在每个波束对应的传输子帧或时隙内加载寻呼信息，这意味着UE对于不同波束上发送的寻呼信息接收将分散到寻呼周期内的多个子帧或时隙中，由于IDLE状态的UE无法预知波束或端口在不同时隙的调度情况，则在新一代无线通信系统中，采用相关LTE系统中通过非连续接收(Discontinuous Reception，DRX)机制传输寻呼信息以节省能耗的机制变得复杂，甚至难以实现。
发明内容
本公开提供了一种寻呼信息的传输方法、装置及系统，以至少解决将相关LTE系统中通过DRX机制接收寻呼信息的方式应用于新一代无线通信系统中时，需要在每个波束对应的传输子帧或时隙内加载寻呼信息，并且由于IDLE状态的UE无法预知波束或端口在不同时隙的调度情况，而导致通过DRX机制传输寻呼信息的方式非常复杂，难以实现的问题。
本公开提供一种寻呼信息的传输方法，包括：
第一通信节点计算第二通信节点的寻呼时机(Paging Occasion，PO)的时域位置；
所述第一通信节点在所述时域位置对应的PO内向所述第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息、寻呼消息；
其中，所述PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输。
本公开还提供一种寻呼消息的传输方法，包括：
第二通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的寻呼时机PO的时域位置；
所述第二通信节点在所述时域位置对应的PO内接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息；
其中，所述PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输。
本公开还提供了一种寻呼信息的传输方法，包括：
第一通信节点向第二通信节点发送指示信息，所述指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，所述第一通信节点和所述第二通信节点配置所述寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；
所述第一通信节点根据所述准共位置关系信息向所述第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息。
本公开还提供了一种寻呼信息的传输方法，包括：
第二通信节点接收第一通信节点发送指示信息，所述指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，所述第二通信节点和所述第一通信节点配置所述寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；
所述第二通信节点根据所述准共位置关系信息接收所述第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息。
本公开还提供了一种寻呼信息的传输装置，设置于第一通信节点中，所述装置包括：
计算模块，设置为计算第二通信节点的寻呼时机PO的时域位置；
发送模块，设置为在所述计算模块计算得到的所述时域位置对应的PO内向所述第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息；
其中，所述PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输。
本公开还提供了一种寻呼消息的传输装置，设置于第二通信节点中，所述装置包括：
计算模块，设置为计算所述第二通信节点的寻呼时机PO的时域位置；
接收模块，设置为在所述计算模块计算得到的所述时域位置对应的PO内接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息；
其中，所述PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输。
本公开还提供了一种寻呼信息的传输装置，设置于第一通信节点中，所述装置包括：发送模块和配置模块；
所述发送模块，设置为向第二通信节点发送指示信息，所述指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，所述配置模块，设置为配置所述第一通信节点中的所述寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫 描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；
所述发送模块，还设置为根据所述准共位置关系信息向所述第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息。
本公开还提供一种寻呼信息的传输装置，设置于第二通信节点中，所述装置包括：接收模块和配置模块；
所述接收模块，设置为接收第一通信节点发送指示信息，所述指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，所述配置模块，设置为配置所述第二通信节点中的所述寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；
所述接收模块，还设置为根据所述准共位置关系信息接收所述第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息。
本公开还提供一种寻呼信息的传输系统，包括：第一通信节点和至少一个第二通信节点；
其中，所述第一通信节点中配置有上述相应的寻呼信息的传输装置，每个所述第二通信节点中配置有上述相应的寻呼信息的传输装置；或者，
所述第一通信节点中配置有上述相应的寻呼信息的传输装置，每个所述第二通信节点中配置有上述相应的寻呼信息的传输装置。
本公开还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，存储有计算机可执行指令，所述计算机可执行指令用于执行上述任意一种方法。
本公开还提供一种基站，该基站包括一个或多个处理器、存储器以及一个或多个程序，所述一个或多个程序存储在存储器中，当被一个或多个处理器执行时，执行上述对应的方法。
本公开还提供一种终端设备，该终端设备包括一个或多个处理器、存储器以及一个或多个程序，所述一个或多个程序存储在存储器中，当被一个或多个处理器执行时，执行上述对应的方法。
本公开还提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括存储在非暂态计算机可读存储介质上的计算机程序，所述计算机程序包括程序指令，当所述程序指令被计算机执行时，使所述计算机执行上述任意一种方法。
本公开提供的寻呼信息的传输方法、装置及系统，可以解决将相关LTE系 统中通过DRX机制接收寻呼信息的方式应用于新一代无线通信系统中，则需要在每个波束对应的传输子帧或时隙内加载寻呼信息，并且由于IDLE状态的UE无法预知波束或端口在不同时隙的调度情况，而导致通过DRX机制传输寻呼信息的方式非常复杂，难以实现的问题。
附图说明
图1为一实施例提供的一种寻呼信息的传输方法的流程图；
图2为一实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法中一种同步信号窗组的结构示意图；
图3为一实施例提供的另一种寻呼信息的传输方法的流程图；
图4为一实施例提供的一种寻呼信息的传输装置的结构示意图；
图5为一实施例提供的另一种寻呼信息的传输装置的结构示意图；
图6为一实施例提供的又一种寻呼信息的传输方法的流程图；
图7为一实施例提供的再一种寻呼信息的传输方法的流程图；
图8为一实施例提供的又一种寻呼信息的传输装置的结构示意图；
图9为一实施例提供的再一种寻呼信息的传输装置的结构示意图；
图10为一实施例提供的还一种寻呼信息的传输方法的流程图；
图11为一实施例提供的还一种寻呼信息的传输装置的结构示意图；
图12为一实施例提供的还一种寻呼信息的传输方法的流程图；
图13为一实施例提供的还一种寻呼信息的传输装置的结构示意图；
图14为一实施例提供一种寻呼信息的传输系统的结构示意图；
图15为一实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法中一种T DRX的示意图；
图16为一实施示例1提供的一种T DRX与T paging的关系示意图；
图17为一子实施示例1-1提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图；
图18为图17所示子实施示例1-1中的终端的PO的结构示意图；
图19为一子实施示例1-2提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图；
图20为一子实施示例1-3提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图；
图21为图20所示子实施示例1-3中的终端的PO的结构示意图；
图22为一子实施示例1-4提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图；
图23为图22所示子实施示例1-4中的终端的一种PO的结构示意图；
图24为图22所示子实施示例1-4中的终端的另一种PO的结构示意图；
图25为一实施示例2提供的一种T paging与T DRX的关系示意图；
图26为一实施示例3提供的一种T paging与T DRX的关系示意图；
图27为一子实施示例5-1提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图；
图28为一子实施示例5-2提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图；
图29为一子实施示例5-2提供的另一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图；
图30为一子实施示例5-2提供的又一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图；
图31为一实施示例6提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图；
图32为一实施示例9提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图；
图33为一子实施示例9-2提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图；
图34为一子实施示例9-3提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图；
图35为一子实施示例9-4提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图；
图36为一实施示例10中的终端的PO的结构示意图；
图37为一实施示例11中的终端的PO的结构示意图；
图38为一实施示例12中的终端的PO的结构示意图；
图39为一实施示例13中的终端的PO的结构示意图；
图40为一实施例提供的基站的硬件结构示意图；
图41为一实施例提供的终端设备的硬件结构示意图。
具体实施方式
在附图的流程图示出的步骤可以在诸如一组计算机可执行指令的计算机系统中执行。并且，虽然在流程图中示出了逻辑顺序，但是在一些情况下，可以以不同于此处的顺序执行所示出或描述的步骤。
在描述本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法之前，简要说明基站发送寻呼信息的方式。通常在UE接入网络的过程中进行初步波束方向的测量与识别，确定优选的上下行收发波束，并应用在后续的上下行数据通信中。接入网络的UE在没有业务需要传输时，将进入空闲(IDLE)状态，处于IDLE状态的UE需要监听寻呼信息，来检测核心网侧是否有针对该UE的寻呼信息域，该寻呼信息域例如包括下行数据到来指示、系统消息变更、接收地震及海啸预警系统(Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System，EWTS)信息以及接收商业移动预警服务(Commercial Mobile Alert Service，CMAS)信息等。一方面，由于UE的移动性，网络侧无法获知IDLE状态的UE的准确位置，因此，寻呼信息将在跟 踪区域内进行发送以确保指定UE的可靠接收。另一方面，出于节能考虑，IDLE状态的UE使用DRX机制，并只在特定的时刻“醒来”，这个特定的时刻称为寻呼时机，该PO通常为UE根据DRX周期和UE标识计算得到的特定无线帧内的特定子帧位置，终端解调控制信道获取当前网络侧是否有寻呼信息，并根据寻呼调度信息在数据信道上确定网络侧是否要寻呼本UE，以及寻呼原因是什么，并根据寻呼原因执行相应的后续操作。
在新一代无线通信系统中，特别是应用在较高频段时，波束赋形技术的应用使得单一发射端口的覆盖范围局限在很小的角度内，此时，网络侧将无法获知空闲(IDLE)状态的UE在哪个波束或端口下，与低频段小区级寻呼消息发送机制相比，若要确保对每个UE潜在位置的覆盖，则需要全波束的重复发送寻呼信息，即网络侧需要发射更多的寻呼信息，以确保要对每一个波束方向或端口下的UE均有机会接收到指定的寻呼信息。由于基站射频链数量的限制，基站需要在不同波束方向或端口上通过时分复用的方式发射寻呼信息，在基于波束传输的系统中，不同子帧或时隙的波束方向是基于业务灵活配置的。若采用LTE系统的寻呼机制，需要在每个波束对应的传输子帧或时隙内加载寻呼信息，这意味着UE对于不同波束上发送的寻呼信息接收将分散到寻呼周期内的多个子帧或时隙中，由于IDLE状态的UE无法预知波束或端口在不同时隙的调度情况，则在新一代无线通信系统中，采用LTE系统中通过DRX机制传输寻呼信息以节省能耗的机制变得复杂，甚至难以实现。
如何能在有效覆盖目标区域的基本要求下，提供一种更利于UE节能接收的寻呼信息传输机制及寻呼时机确定方法，是新一代无线通信系统亟需解决的问题。
通过以下实施例对本申请的方法进行说明，本申请以下实施例中交互执行的实体包括第一通信节点和第二通信节点，第一通信节点可以是新一代无线通信系统中的基站，可以包括：基站(Base Station，BS)、演进型基站(evolved Node B，eNB)，第二通信节点可以是新一代无线通信系统中的终端设备，例如为用户设备(User Equipment，UE)。本申请提供以下几个实施例可以相互结合，对于相同或相似的概念或过程可能在一些实施例不再赘述。
图1为本实施例提供的一种寻呼信息的传输方法的流程图。本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法适用于在新一代无线通信系统中进行寻呼的情况中，该方法可以由寻呼信息的传输装置执行，该寻呼信息的传输装置通过硬件和软件 结合的方式来实现，该装置可以集成在第一通信节点的处理器中，供处理器调用。如图1所示，本实施例的方法可以包括：
在步骤110中，第一通信节点计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置。
本实施例中，提供第一通信节点向其覆盖范围内的第二通信节点发送寻呼信息的方式，在第一通信节点的覆盖范围内，具有多个小区，每个小区中具有多个第二通信节点。第一通信节点可以在不同第二通信节点的PO内向其发送寻呼信息，因此，第一通信节点在发送寻呼信息前，需要计算针对一个第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，从而得知在哪些特定的时域位置上向该第二通信节点发送寻呼信息。
在本实施例中，涉及到两种类型的通信节点：第一类通信节点可以是宏微基站，中继节点，传输参考点(Transmission Reference Point，TRP)等网络侧设备，本实施例中用于发送寻呼信息；第二类通信节点可以是终端设备，或中继节点，本实施例中用于接收网络侧设备发送的寻呼信息。在本实施例中应用场景中，可以通过第一类通信节点为基站，第二类通信节点为UE为例进行说明，并不表示限定。
在步骤120中，第一通信节点在时域位置对应的PO内向第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，该寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息；其中，PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源可以用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输。
PO可以对应于一个同步信号窗组，或者对应于一组预设波束或端口的扫描资源。
在本实施例中，第一通信节点在计算出针对一个第二通信节点的PO的时频位置后，即可以在该时频位置对应的PO内向该第二通信节点发送寻呼信息。在本实施例中，寻呼信息包括：寻呼下行控制信息(paging Downlink Control Information，paging DCI)和寻呼消息(paging message)中的至少之一；寻呼下行控制信息(paging DCI)为用于指示寻呼信息的调度信息，包括以下信息的一项或多项：资源分配信息，编码调制方式信息，帧结构参数信息，寻呼消息(paging message)用于指示与当前寻呼信息相关的终端标识，及寻呼原因。当寻呼下行控制信息与寻呼消息分别采用独立的扫描资源时，第一通信节点也可以向第二通信节点指示寻呼下行控制信息与寻呼消息间的准共位置关系。以便于终端可以依据接收的寻呼下行控制信息的资源，及准共位置关系，确定寻呼消息的资 源，并接收该寻呼消息。通常寻呼信息的传输需要确定时频位置，即时域位置和频域位置，本公开提供的内容涉及对时域位置的确定。考虑到高频段(如28GHz，60GHz等)的高的传输损耗，新一代无线通信系统中引入波束级传输的方式，即通过在收发两端引入波束赋形技术，获得增益，从而提高覆盖，对于寻呼信息的传输也是如此。这样与相关LTE系统间的区别在于第二类通信节点需要在多个波束或端口以扫描(sweeping)的形式重复发送寻呼信息，以保证第一类通信节点的全向覆盖。这种扫描的传输方式下，倾向于引入扫描资源来承载扫描传输。
如图2所示为本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法中一种同步信号窗组的结构示意图，该同步信号窗组(SS burst set)的结构是用于传输同步信号(Synchronous signal，SS)的扫描资源，其中同步信号窗组包含一个或多个同步信号窗(SS burst)，一个SS burst包含一个或多个同步信号块(SS block)，每个SS block内承载特定波束或端口(组)的同步信号，在一个同步信号窗组内完成一次波束扫描，即完成所有波束或端口的发送。其中，同步信号块内还可以包含物理广播信道(Physical broadcast channel，PBCH)，PBCH对应的解调参考信号，其他控制信道，数据信道等其他信号。
在本实施例中，对于寻呼信息的传输，可以与同步信号复用同步信号窗组的资源，或者预设一组波束或端口的扫描资源。此时，第二通信节点的PO不再是LTE系统中的一个子帧，而是对应于一个完整的扫描资源，例如对应于一个同步信号窗组(SS burst set)，或对应于一组预设的扫描资源，例如，第一通信节点在寻呼窗组(paging burst set)内完成寻呼信息的全波束方向或端口的发送，该寻呼窗组(paging burst set)包含一个或多个寻呼窗(paging burst)，一个paging burst包含一个或多个寻呼块(paging block)。
当寻呼信息包含寻呼下行控制信息时，第二通信节点可以在寻呼下行控制信息所指示的时频资源上接收寻呼消息，并判断是否有属于自己的寻呼通知。上述寻呼信息也可以只包含寻呼消息，此时，第二通信节点需要完整接收寻呼消息，以确定是否有属于自己的寻呼通知。当然，寻呼信息也可以包含寻呼下行控制指示和寻呼消息，第二通信节点首先接收寻呼下行控制信息，并根据寻呼下行控制信息接收同一同步信号块(SS block)或寻呼块(paging block)内的寻呼消息。
相关LTE系统中发送寻呼信息的方式为，第二通信节点的PO是LTE系统 中的一个帧，或一个帧的特定子帧。与相关LTE系统中发送寻呼信息的方式相比，本实施例中计算出的PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源中可以包括一个或多个寻呼资源，可以用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输，并且该PO对应于同步信号窗组或对应于一组预设波束或端口的扫描资源，即第一通信节点可以在上述窗组或扫描资源内通过全波束方向或端口发送寻呼信息，以保证在一个第二通信节点的PO内可以有效的接收到寻呼信息。
本实施例所提供的寻呼信息的传输方法，通过第一通信节点计算第二通信节点的寻呼时机PO的时域位置，并且在计算出的时域位置对应的PO内向第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，该寻呼信息包括寻呼下行控制信息或/和寻呼消息；本实施例提供的技术方案中，通过将第二通信节点的PO设置为包括一组寻呼资源，这一组寻呼资源可以用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输，并且该PO对应于同步信号窗组或对应于一组预设波束或端口的扫描资源，即第一通信节点可以在上述窗组或扫描资源内通过全波束方向或端口发送寻呼信息，以保证在一个第二通信节点的PO内可以有效的接收到寻呼信息，从而解决了将相关LTE系统中通过DRX机制接收寻呼信息的方式应用于新一代无线通信系统中，则需要在每个波束对应的传输子帧或时隙内加载寻呼信息，并且由于IDLE状态的UE无法预知波束或端口在不同时隙的调度情况，而导致通过DRX机制传输寻呼信息的方式非常复杂，难以实现的问题。
在一实施例中，步骤110可以包括如下步骤：
第一通信节点计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号；
第一通信节点根据起点无线帧号和PO的时长，计算得到PO的时域位置。
图3为本实施例提供的另一种寻呼信息的传输方法的流程图。在图1所示实施例的基础上，本实施例提供的方法中，S110的实现方式可以为：第一通信节点根据PO确定参数计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，该PO确定参数包括以下一项或多项：
1、第二通信节点的非连续接收周期T DRX；
2、第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔T paging；
3、第一通信节点在非连续接收周期内发送寻呼信息的数量N；
4、第二通信节点标识Device_ID；
5、第二通信节点的PO偏移量t offset。
在一实施例中，在步骤120之前，还可以包括：
在步骤111中，第一通信节点将PO确定参数发送给第二通信节点；PO确定参数的也包括上述参数中的一项或多项，向第二通信节点发送PO确定参数，用于指示第二通信节点可以根据该PO确定参数计算出同样的PO的时域位置，从而，可以使得第一通信节点和第二通信节点在相同的PO内进行发送和接收寻呼信息。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的第二通信节点的非连续接收周期为该第二通信节点接收寻呼信息的周期，本实施例提供的方法在步骤110之前，还可以包括：
在步骤100中，第一通信节点配置第二通信节点的非连续接收周期；或者，第一通信节点接收第二通信节点确定并发送的该第二通信节点的非连续接收周期。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔对应一个PO，即对应一个第二通信节点的一个PO，即第一通信节点在寻呼发送间隔向一个第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，本实施例中的步骤120的实现方式，可以为：第一通信节点在PO对应的寻呼发送间隔内通过所有波束或端口向第二通信节点发送寻呼信息。也就是说，第一通信节点在每个寻呼发送间隔内都可以发送寻呼信息，并且在每个寻呼发送间隔内完成所有波束或端口的发送，以保证该寻呼发送间隔对应的PO的第二通信节点可以有效接收寻呼信息。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的T paging＝n*T SS，或者，T paging＝(1/n)*T SS，其中，T SS为同步信号窗组的周期，即如图2中所示的同步信号窗组(SS burst set)的周期，该T SS可以由第一通信节点以广播的方式通知给第二通信节点，另外，n为正整数；也就是说，T paging可以是T SS的整数倍或是的T SS约数。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的PO偏移量为用于调整第二通信节点的PO的时域位置的参数。例如，可以在一些应用场景下，通过设置PO偏移量得到可以复用同步信号窗组的效果。
在本实施例的一种可能的实现方式中，可以通过上述PO确定参数中的第二通信节点标识计算PO的时域位置，步骤110的实现方式可以为：第一通信节点根据第二通信节点标识，计算出非连续接收周期内的一组寻呼资源为第二通信节点的PO，并且计算得到本组寻呼资源对应的起点无线帧号。
在该实现方式中，第一通信节点通过以下公式之一计算第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000003
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(Device_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))；
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000006
SFN mod T DRX＝(T DRX/N)*(Device_ID mod N)；
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000009
SFN mod TDRX＝T paging*(Device_ID mod(TDRX/T paging))+t offset；
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000012
SFN mod T DRX＝(T DRX/N)*(Device_ID mod N)+t offset；
其中，SFN为第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号，在实际应用场景中，第一通信节点根据PO确定参数的内容选取上述公式之一计算PO对应的起点无线帧号。
在一实施例中，如上述公式所示，部分公式中具有PO偏移量，在该实现方式中，在步骤110之前，还可以包括：第一通信节点为小区内的第二通信节点配置统一的PO偏移量。
在本实施例的另一种可能的实现方式中，可以通过上述PO确定参数中的PO偏移量计算PO的时域位置，步骤110的实现方式可以包括：
第一通信节点为第二通信节点配置预设的PO偏移量；
第一通信节点根据配置的PO偏移量计算出非连续接收周期内的一组寻呼资源为该第二通信节点的PO，并且计算得到本组寻呼资源对应的起点无线帧号。
在该实现方式中，第一通信节点通过以下公式计算第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号：SFN mod T DRX＝t offset；其中，SFN同样为第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号。
在该实现方式中，步骤110之前还可以包括：第一通信节点为小区内的每 个第二通信节点配置一个PO偏移量，且每个第二通信节点配置的PO偏移量为相同的或不同的，不同的PO偏移量用于将第二通信节点配置到不同的PO内。
在一实施例中，在上述实施例的基础上，当第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔小于无线帧长度时，本实施例提供的方法，在计算出第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号之后，还可以包括：第一通信节点计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置。相应地，在本实施例中，步骤120的实现方式可以为：第一通信节点在起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置对应的PO内向第二通信节点发送寻呼信息。
在实际应用中，计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置的实现方式，可以包括：第一通信节点根据第二通信节点标识计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置。
举例来说，若无线帧长度为2n毫秒(ms)，该无线帧包含2m个子帧，第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔为n毫秒，起点子帧位置为子帧0或子帧m，并且该起点子帧位置可以通过第二通信节点标识(Device_ID)的最后一个比特bit表示，例如通过0或1来表示。
在一实施例中，第二通信节点还可以通过准共位置关系信息确定接收寻呼信息的方式。在一种实现方式中，第一通信节点和第二通信节点通信中预先配置有寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息，即上述通信节点通过共同的协议或所属系统预定义该准共位置关系信息。在另一种实现方式中，步骤120之前，还可以包括：第一通信节点向第二通信节点指示信息，该指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息。
在本实施例中，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息的参考信号，例如，寻呼消息的解调参考信号；或者，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息相关的物理控制信道的参考信号，例如，承载寻呼下行控制信息(paging DCI)的下行物理控制信道的解调参考信号。上述其他扫描信号或信道包括以下信号或信道中的一项或多项：同步信号(SS)，物理广播信道(PBCH)的解调参考信号，波束参考信号(Beam reference signal，BRS)，解调参考信号(Demodulation reference signal，DMRS)，移动性参考信号(Mobility reference signal，MRS)，信道状态指示参考信号(Channel State Information-Reference Signals，CSI-RS)。上述准共位置关系信息包括：与寻呼信息相关信号存在准 共位置关系的信号或信道信息，以及寻呼信息相关信号的端口号或/和资源与其他扫描信号或信道的端口号或/和资源的映射关系。
图4为本实施例提供的一种寻呼信息的传输装置的结构示意图。本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输装置适用于在新一代无线通信系统中进行寻呼的情况中，该寻呼信息的传输装置通过硬件和软件结合的方式来实现，该装置可以集成在第一通信节点的处理器中，供处理器调用使用。如图4所示，本实施例的寻呼信息的传输装置100可以包括：计算模块110和发送模块120。
其中，计算模块110，设置为计算第二通信节点的寻呼时机PO的时域位置。
本实施例中，提供第一通信节点向其覆盖范围内的第二通信节点发送寻呼信息的方式，在第一通信节点的覆盖范围内，具有多个小区，每个小区中具有多个第二通信节点。第一通信节点可以在不同第二通信节点的PO内向其发送寻呼信息，因此，第一通信节点在发送寻呼信息前，需要计算针对一个第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，从而得知在哪些特定的时域位置上向该第二通信节点发送寻呼信息。本实施例中涉及到的第一类通信节点和第二类通信节点的实体和功能在上述实施例中已经详细说明，故在此不再赘述。
发送模块120，设置为在计算模块110计算得到的时域位置对应的PO内向第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，该寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息；其中，PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源可以用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输。
PO可以对应于一个同步信号窗组，或者对应于一组预设波束或端口的扫描资源。
在本实施例中，第一通信节点在计算出针对一个第二通信节点的PO的时频位置后，即可以在该时频位置对应的PO内向该第二通信节点发送寻呼信息。在本实施例中，寻呼信息包括：寻呼下行控制信息或/和寻呼消息，上述实施例中已经详细说明寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息的内容和作用，以及同步信号窗组和预设波束或端口的扫描资源的结构，故在此不再赘述。
当寻呼信息包含寻呼下行控制信息时，第二通信节点可以在寻呼下行控制信息所指示的时频资源上接收寻呼消息，并判断是否有属于自己的寻呼通知。上述寻呼信息也可以只包含寻呼消息，此时，第二通信节点需要完整接收寻呼消息，以确定是否有属于自己的寻呼通知。当然，寻呼信息也可以包含寻呼下行控制指示和寻呼消息，并首先接收寻呼下行控制信息，并根据寻呼下行控制 信息接收同一同步信号块(SS block)或寻呼块(paging block)内的寻呼消息。
本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输装置用于执行图1所示实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法，具备相应的功能模块，其实现原理和技术效果类似，此处不再赘述。
在一实施例中，计算模块110可以包括：
第一计算单元，设置为计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号；
第二计算单元，设置为根据PO的时长和第一计算单元计算得到的起点无线帧号，计算得到PO的时域位置。
在一实施例中，计算模块110计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置的实现方式可以为：根据PO确定参数计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，该PO确定参数包括以下一项或多项：
1、第二通信节点的非连续接收周期T DRX；
2、第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔T paging；
3、第一通信节点在非连续接收周期内发送寻呼信息的数量N；
4、第二通信节点标识Device_ID；
5、第二通信节点的PO偏移量t offset。
在一实施例中，寻呼信息的传输装置100的发送模块120，还设置为在发送寻呼信息之前，将PO确定参数发送给第二通信节点；PO确定参数的也包括上述参数中的一项或多项，向第二通信节点发送PO确定参数，用于指示第二通信节点可以根据该PO确定参数计算出同样的PO的时域位置，从而，可以使得第一通信节点和第二通信节点在相同的PO内进行发送和接收寻呼信息。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的第二通信节点的非连续接收周期为该第二通信节点接收寻呼信息的周期，图5为本实施例提供的另一种寻呼信息的传输装置的结构示意图。在图4所示实施例的结构基础上，本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输装置100还可以包括：配置模块130和接收模块140中的一项或多项；图5所示装置以包括配置模块130和接收模块140为例予以示出。
其中，配置模块130，设置为在计算模块110计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置之前，配置第二通信节点的非连续接收周期；
接收模块140，设置为在计算模块110计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置之前，接收第二通信节点确定并发送的第二通信节点的非连续接收周期。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔对应一 个PO，即对应一个第二通信节点的一个PO，本实施例中的发送模块120向第二通信节点发送寻呼信息的实现方式，可以为：在PO对应的寻呼发送间隔内通过所有波束或端口向第二通信节点发送寻呼信息。也就是说，第一通信节点在每个寻呼发送间隔内都可以发送寻呼信息，并且在每个寻呼发送间隔内完成所有波束或端口的发送，以保证该寻呼发送间隔对应的PO的第二通信节点可以有效接收寻呼信息。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的T paging＝n*T SS，或者，T paging＝(l/n)*T SS，其中，T SS为同步信号窗组的周期，n为正整数；也就是说，T paging可以是T SS的整数倍或是的T SS约数。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的PO偏移量为用于调整第二通信节点的PO的时域位置的参数。例如，可以在一些应用场景下，通过设置PO偏移量得到可以复用同步信号窗组的效果。
在本实施例的一种可能的实现方式中，可以通过上述PO确定参数中的第二通信节点标识计算PO的时域位置，计算模块110计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置的实现方式可以为：根据第二通信节点标识，计算出非连续接收周期内的一组寻呼资源为第二通信节点的PO，并且计算得到本组寻呼资源对应的起点无线帧号。
在该实现方式中，计算模块110通过以下公式之一计算第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000015
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(Device_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))；
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000016
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000017
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000018
SFN mod T DRX＝(T DRX/N)*(Device_ID mod N)；
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000019
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000020
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000021
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(Device_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))+t offset；
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000022
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000023
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000024
SFN mod T DRX＝(T DRX/N)*(Device_ID mod N)+t offset；
其中，SFN为第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号，在实际应用场景中，第一通信节点根据PO确定参数的内容选取上述公式之一计算PO对应的起点无线帧号。
在一实施例中，如上述公式所示，部分公式中具有PO偏移量，在该实现方式中，寻呼信息的传输装置100中的配置模块130，还设置为在计算模块110计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置之前，为小区内的第二通信节点配置统一的PO偏移量。
在本实施例的另一种可能的实现方式中，可以通过上述PO确定参数中的PO偏移量计算PO的时域位置，计算模块110计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置的实现方式可以包括：为第二通信节点配置预设的PO偏移量；根据配置的PO偏移量计算出非连续接收周期内的一组寻呼资源为第二通信节点的PO，并且计算得到本组寻呼资源对应的起点无线帧号。
在该实现方式中，计算模块110通过以下公式计算第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号：SFN mod T DRX＝t offset；其中，SFN同样为第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号。
在该实现方式中，配置模块130，还设置为在计算模块110计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置之前，为小区内的每个第二通信节点配置一个PO偏移量，且每个第二通信节点配置的PO偏移量为相同的或不同的，不同的PO偏移量用于将第二通信节点配置到不同的PO内。
在一实施例中，在上述实施例的基础上，当第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔小于无线帧长度时，本实施例中的计算模块110还可以包括：第三计算单元，设置为在第一计算单元计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号之后，计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置。相应地，在本实施例中，发送模块120发送寻呼信息的实现方式可以为：在起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置对应的PO内向第二通信节点发送寻呼信息。
在实际应用中，第三计算单元计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置的实现方式，可以包括：根据第二通信节点标识计算第二通信节点 的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置。
举例来说，若无线帧长度为2n毫秒(ms)，该无线帧包含2m个子帧，第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔为n毫秒，起点子帧位置为子帧0或子帧m，并且该起点子帧位置可以通过第二通信节点标识(Device_ID)的最后一个比特bit表示，例如通过0或1来表示。
在一实施例中，第二通信节点还可以通过准共位置关系信息确定接收寻呼信息的方式。在一种实现方式中，第一通信节点和第二通信节点通信中预先配置有寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息，即上述通信节点通过共同的协议或所属系统预定义该准共位置关系信息。在另一种实现方式中，发送模块120，还设置为在向第二通信节点发送寻呼信息之前，向第二通信节点发送指示信息，该指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息。
在本实施例中，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息的参考信号，例如，寻呼消息的解调参考信号；或者，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息相关的物理控制信道的参考信号，例如，承载寻呼下行控制信息(paging DCI)的下行物理控制信道的解调参考信号。上述其他扫描信号或信道包括以下信号或信道中的一项或多项：同步信号(SS)，物理广播信道(PBCH)的解调参考信号，波束参考信号(BRS)，解调参考信号(DMRS)，移动性参考信号(MRS)，信道状态指示参考信号(CSI-RS)。上述准共位置关系信息包括：与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息，以及寻呼信息相关信号的端口号或/和资源与其他扫描信号或信道的端口号或/和资源的映射关系。
本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输装置用于执行图3所示实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法，具备相应的功能模块，其实现原理和技术效果类似，此处不再赘述。
图6为本实施例提供的又一种寻呼信息的传输方法的流程图。本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法适用于在新一代无线通信系统中进行寻呼的情况中，该方法可以由寻呼信息的传输装置执行，该寻呼信息的传输装置通过硬件和软件结合的方式来实现，该装置可以集成在第二通信节点的处理器中，供处理器调用使用。如图6所示，本实施例的方法可以包括：
在步骤210中，第二通信节点计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置。
本实施例中，提供第一通信节点向其覆盖范围内的第二通信节点发送寻呼 信息的方式，在第一通信节点的覆盖范围内，具有多个小区，每个小区中具有多个第二通信节点。第一通信节点可以在不同第二通信节点的PO内向其发送寻呼信息，因此，第一通信节点在发送寻呼信息前，需要计算针对一个第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，从而得知在哪些特定的时域位置上向该第二通信节点发送寻呼信息。本实施例中涉及到的第一类通信节点和第二类通信节点的实体和功能在上述实施例中已经详细说明，故在此不再赘述。
在步骤220中，第二通信节点在时域位置对应的PO内接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息；其中，PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源可以用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输。
PO可以对应于一个同步信号窗组，或者对应于一组预设波束或端口的扫描资源。
在本实施例中，第二通信节点在计算出第一通信节点针对自身的PO的时频位置后，即可以在该时频位置对应的PO内向接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息。在本实施例中，寻呼信息包括：寻呼下行控制信息或/和寻呼消息，上述实施例中已经详细说明寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息的内容和作用，以及同步信号窗组和预设波束或端口的扫描资源的结构，故在此不再赘述。
在本实施例中，参考图2所示同步信号窗组，第二通信节点需要确定属于自身的同步信号窗组，并在指定的同步信号窗组内接收潜在的寻呼消息。在一实施例中，第二通信节点在接收寻呼消息之前完成了下行链路的优选收发波束训练，这样终端可以以优选的接收波束，在第一通信节点优选发射波束所对应的同步信号块(SS block)内接收寻呼消息。
当寻呼信息包含寻呼下行控制信息时，第二通信节点可以在寻呼下行控制信息所指示的时频资源上接收寻呼消息，并判断是否有属于自己的寻呼通知。上述寻呼信息也可以只包含寻呼消息，此时，第二通信节点需要完整接收寻呼消息，以确定是否有属于自己的寻呼通知。当然，寻呼信息也可以包含寻呼下行控制指示和寻呼消息，并首先接收寻呼下行控制信息，并根据寻呼下行控制信息接收同一同步信号块(SS block)或寻呼块(paging block)内的寻呼消息。
本实施例所提供的寻呼信息的传输方法，通过第二通信节点计算第二通信节点的寻呼时机PO的时域位置，并且在计算出的时域位置对应的PO内接收第一通信节点向其发送的寻呼信息，该寻呼信息包括寻呼下行控制信息或/和寻呼 消息；本实施例提供的技术方案中，通过将第二通信节点的PO设置为包括一组寻呼资源，并且该PO对应于同步信号窗组或对应于一组预设波束或端口的扫描资源，即第一通信节点可以在上述窗组或扫描资源内通过全波束方向或端口发送寻呼信息，以保证在一个第二通信节点的PO内可以有效的接收到寻呼信息，从而解决了将相关LTE系统中通过DRX机制接收寻呼信息的方式应用于新一代无线通信系统中，则需要在每个波束对应的传输子帧或时隙内加载寻呼信息，并且由于IDLE状态的UE无法预知波束或端口在不同时隙的调度情况，而导致通过DRX机制传输寻呼信息的方式非常复杂，难以实现的问题。
在一实施例中，步骤210可以包括如下步骤：
第二通信节点计算该第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号；
第二通信节点根据起点无线帧号和PO的时长，计算得到PO的时域位置。
在一实施例中，图7为本实施例提供的再一种寻呼信息的传输方法的流程图。在图6所示实施例的基础上，本实施例提供的方法中，在步骤210之前还可以包括：
在步骤200中，第二通信节点接收第一通信节点发送的PO确定参数；
本实施例中S210的实现方式可以为：第二通信节点根据PO确定参数计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，该PO确定参数可以为第二通信节点从第一通信节点接收的，还可以为第二通信节点中配置的。该PO确定参数包括以下一项或多项：
1、第二通信节点的非连续接收周期T DRX；
2、第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔T paging；
3、第一通信节点在非连续接收周期内发送寻呼信息的数量N；
4、第二通信节点标识Device_ID；
5、第二通信节点的PO偏移量t offset。
举例来说，非连续接收周期T DRX可以是第一通信节点配置并发送的，也可以是第二通信节点自身配置的，第二通信节点标识Device_ID为第二通信节点中已配置的，PO偏移量为第一通信节点配置并发送给第二通信节点的。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的第二通信节点的非连续接收周期为该第二通信节点接收寻呼信息的周期，本实施例提供的方法在步骤210之前，还可以包括：第二通信节点接收一通信节点配置并发送的第二通信节点的非连续接收周期；或者，第二通信节点配置第二通信节点的非连续接收周期。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔对应一个PO，本实施例中的步骤220的实现方式，可以为：第二通信节点接收第一通信节点在PO对应的寻呼发送间隔内通过所有波束或端口发送的寻呼信息。也就是说，第一通信节点在每个寻呼发送间隔内都可以发送寻呼信息，并且在每个寻呼发送间隔内完成所有波束或端口的发送，以保证该寻呼发送间隔对应的PO的第二通信节点可以有效接收寻呼信息。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔T paging和第二通信节点的PO偏移量t offset在上述实施例中已经消息说明，故在此不再赘述。
在本实施例的一种可能的实现方式中，可以通过上述PO确定参数中的第二通信节点标识计算PO的时域位置，步骤210的实现方式可以为：第二通信节点根据第二通信节点标识，计算出非连续接收周期内的一组寻呼资源为第二通信节点的PO，并且计算得到本组寻呼资源对应的起点无线帧号。
在该实现方式中，第二通信节点通过以下公式之一计算第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000025
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000026
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(Device_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))；
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000028
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000029
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000030
SFN mod T DRX＝(T DRX/N)*(Device_ID mod N)；
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000031
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000032
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000033
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(Device_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))+t offset；
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000034
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000035
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000036
SFN mod T DRX＝(T DRX/N)*(Device_ID mod N)+t offset；
其中，SFN为第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号，在实际应用场景中，第二通信节点根据PO确定参数的内容选取上述公式之一计算PO对应的起点无线帧号。在一实施例中，如上述公式所示，部分公式中具有PO偏移量，在该实现方式中，小区内的第二通信节点配置有统一的PO偏移量。
在本实施例的另一种可能的实现方式中，可以通过上述PO确定参数中的PO偏移量计算PO的时域位置，并且小区内的第二通信节点配置有预设的PO偏移量，该实现方式中步骤210的实现方式可以包括：第二通信节点根据配置的PO偏移量计算出非连续接收周期内的一组寻呼资源为第二通信节点的PO，并且计算得到本组寻呼资源对应的起点无线帧号。
在该实现方式中，第二通信节点通过以下公式计算第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号：SFN mod T DRX＝t offset；其中，SFN同样为第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号。
在该实现方式中，小区内的每个第二通信节点配置有一个PO偏移量，且每个第二通信节点配置的PO偏移量为相同的或不同的，不同的PO偏移量用于将第二通信节点配置到不同的PO内。
在一实施例中，在上述实施例的基础上，当第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔小于无线帧长度时，本实施例提供的方法，在计算出第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号之后，还可以包括：第二通信节点计算该第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置。相应地，在本实施例中，步骤220的实现方式可以为：第二通信节点在起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置对应的PO内接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息。
在实际应用中，计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置的实现方式，可以包括：第二通信节点根据该第二通信节点标识计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置。
举例来说，若无线帧长度为2n毫秒(ms)，该无线帧包含2m个子帧，第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔为n毫秒，起点子帧位置为子帧0或子帧m，并且该起点子帧位置可以通过第二通信节点标识(Device_ID)的最后一个比特bit表示，例如通过0或1来表示。
在一实施例中，第二通信节点还可以通过准共位置关系信息确定接收寻呼信息的方式。在一种实现方式中，第二通信节点和第一通信节点通信中预先配置有寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息，即上 述通信节点通过共同的协议或所属系统预定义该准共位置关系信息。在另一种实现方式中，步骤220之前，还可以包括：步骤211，第二通信节点接收第一通信节点发送的指示信息，该指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息。相应地，本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法，在步骤220之前还可以包括：步骤212，第二通信节点根据对与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息的测量或接收，确定第二通信节点对寻呼信息的接收方式。该接收方式指接收寻呼信息的资源，及接收波束或端口，即第二通信节点利用哪个接收天线端口在寻呼信息相关信号对应的寻呼时机(一组寻呼资源)的哪一个资源上接收寻呼信息相关信号。
在本实施例中，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息的参考信号，例如，寻呼消息的解调参考信号；或者，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息相关的物理控制信道的参考信号，例如，承载寻呼下行控制信息(paging DCI)的下行物理控制信道的解调参考信号。上述其他扫描信号或信道包括以下信号或信道中的一项或多项：同步信号(SS)，物理广播信道(PBCH)的解调参考信号，波束参考信号(BRS)，解调参考信号(DMRS)，移动性参考信号MRS)，信道状态指示参考信号(CSI-RS)。上述准共位置关系信息包括：与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息，以及寻呼信息相关信号的端口号或/和资源与其他扫描信号或信道的端口号或/和资源的映射关系。
图8为本实施例提供的又一种寻呼信息的传输装置的结构示意图。本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输装置适用于在新一代无线通信系统中进行寻呼的情况中，该寻呼信息的传输装置通过硬件和软件结合的方式来实现，该装置可以集成在第二通信节点的处理器中，供处理器调用使用。如图8所示，本实施例的寻呼信息的传输装置200可以包括：计算模块210和接收模块220。
其中，计算模块110，设置为计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置。
本实施例中，提供第一通信节点向其覆盖范围内的第二通信节点发送寻呼信息的方式，在第一通信节点的覆盖范围内，具有多个小区，每个小区中具有多个第二通信节点。第一通信节点可以在不同第二通信节点的PO内向其发送寻呼信息，因此，第一通信节点在发送寻呼信息前，需要计算针对一个第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，从而得知在哪些特定的时域位置上向该第二通信节点发送寻呼信息。本实施例中涉及到的第一类通信节点和第二类通信节点的实体和功能在上述实施例中已经详细说明，故在此不再赘述。
接收模块220，设置为在计算模块210计算得到的时域位置对应的PO内接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息；其中，PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源可以用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输。
PO可以对应于一个同步信号窗组，或者对应于一组预设波束或端口的扫描资源。
在本实施例中，第二通信节点的计算模块210在计算出第一通信节点针对自身的PO的时频位置后，即可以在该时频位置对应的PO内向接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息。在本实施例中，寻呼信息包括：寻呼下行控制信息或/和寻呼消息，上述实施例中已经详细说明寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息的内容和作用，以及同步信号窗组和预设波束或端口的扫描资源的结构，故在此不再赘述。
当寻呼信息包含寻呼下行控制信息时，第二通信节点的接收模块220可以在寻呼下行控制信息所指示的时频资源上接收寻呼消息，并判断是否有属于自己的寻呼通知。上述寻呼信息也可以只包含寻呼消息，此时，接收模块220需要完整接收寻呼消息，以确定是否有属于自己的寻呼通知。当然，寻呼信息也可以包含寻呼下行控制指示和寻呼消息，接收模块220首先接收寻呼下行控制信息，并根据寻呼下行控制信息接收同一同步信号块(SS block)或寻呼块(paging block)内的寻呼消息。
本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输装置用于执行图6所示实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法，具备相应的功能模块，其实现原理和技术效果类似，此处不再赘述。
在一实施例中，计算模块210可以包括：
第一计算单元，设置为计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号；
第二计算单元，设置为根据PO的时长和第一计算单元计算得到的起点无线帧号，计算得到PO的时域位置。
在一实施例中，接收模块220，还设置为在计算模块110计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置之前，接收第一通信节点发送的PO确定参数；相应地，计算模块110计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置的实现方式可以为：根据PO确定参数计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，该PO确定参数可以为接收模块220从第一通信节点接收的，还可以为第二通信节点中配置的，该PO确定参数包括以下一项或多项：
1、第二通信节点的非连续接收周期T DRX；
2、第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔T paging；
3、第一通信节点在非连续接收周期内发送寻呼信息的数量N；
4、第二通信节点标识Device_ID；
5、第二通信节点的PO偏移量t offset。
举例来说，非连续接收周期T DRX可以是第一通信节点配置并发送的，也可以是第二通信节点自身配置的，第二通信节点标识Device_ID为第二通信节点中已配置的，PO偏移量为第一通信节点配置并发送给第二通信节点的。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的第二通信节点的非连续接收周期为该第二通信节点接收寻呼信息的周期，图9为本实施例提供的再一种寻呼信息的传输装置的结构示意图。在图8所示实施例的结构基础上，本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输装置200还可以包括：配置模块230。
本实施例中的接收模块220，还设置为在计算模块210计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置之前，接收第一通信节点配置并发送的第二通信节点的非连续接收周期；
配置模块230，设置为在计算模块210计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置之前，配置第二通信节点的非连续接收周期。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔对应一个PO，本实施例中的接收模块220接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息的实现方式，可以为：接收第一通信节点在PO对应的寻呼发送间隔内通过所有波束或端口发送的寻呼信息。也就是说，第一通信节点在每个寻呼发送间隔内都可以发送寻呼信息，并且在每个寻呼发送间隔内完成所有波束或端口的发送，以保证该寻呼发送间隔对应的PO的第二通信节点可以有效接收寻呼信息。
在一实施例中，上述PO确定参数中的第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔T paging和第二通信节点的PO偏移量t offset在上述实施例中已经消息说明，故在此不再赘述。
在本实施例的一种可能的实现方式中，可以通过上述PO确定参数中的第二通信节点标识计算PO的时域位置，计算模块210计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置的实现方式可以为：根据第二通信节点标识，计算出非连续接收周期内的一组寻呼资源为第二通信节点的PO，并且计算得到本组寻呼资源对应的起点无线帧号。
在该实现方式中，计算模块210通过以下公式之一计算第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000037
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000038
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000039
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(Device_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))；
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000040
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000041
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000042
SFN mod T DRX＝(T DRX/N)*(Device_ID mod N)；
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000043
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000044
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000045
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(Device_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))+t offset；
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000046
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000047
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000048
SFN mod T DRX＝(T DRX/N)*(Device_ID mod N)+t offset；
其中，SFN为第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号，在实际应用场景中，计算模块210根据PO确定参数的内容选取上述公式之一计算PO对应的起点无线帧号。在一实施例中，如上述公式所示，部分公式中具有PO偏移量，在该实现方式中，小区内的第二通信节点配置有统一的PO偏移量。
在本实施例的另一种可能的实现方式中，可以通过上述PO确定参数中的PO偏移量计算PO的时域位置，并且小区内的第二通信节点配置有预设的PO偏移量，该实现方式中计算模块210计算第二通信节点的PO的时域位置的实现方式可以包括：根据配置的PO偏移量计算出非连续接收周期内的一组寻呼资源为第二通信节点的PO，并且计算得到本组寻呼资源对应的起点无线帧号。
在该实现方式中，计算模块210通过以下公式计算第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号：SFN mod T DRX＝t offset；其中，SFN同样为第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号。
在该实现方式中，小区内的每个第二通信节点配置有一个PO偏移量，且每 个第二通信节点配置的PO偏移量为相同的或不同的，不同的PO偏移量用于将第二通信节点配置到不同的PO内。
在一实施例中，在上述实施例的基础上，当第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔小于无线帧长度时，本实施例中的计算模块还可以包括：第三计算单元，设置为在第一计算单元计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号之后，计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置。相应地，本实施例中接收模块220接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息的实现方式可以为：在起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置对应的PO内接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息。
在实际应用中，第三计算单元计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置的实现方式，可以包括：根据该第二通信节点标识计算第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置。
举例来说，若无线帧长度为2n毫秒(ms)，该无线帧包含2m个子帧，第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔为n毫秒，起点子帧位置为子帧0或子帧m，并且该起点子帧位置可以通过第二通信节点标识(Device_ID)的最后一个比特bit表示，例如通过0或1来表示。
在一实施例中，第二通信节点还可以通过准共位置关系信息确定接收寻呼信息的方式。在一种实现方式中，第二通信节点和第一通信节点通信中预先配置有寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息，即上述通信节点通过共同的协议或所属系统预定义该准共位置关系信息。在另一种实现方式中，接收模块220，还设置为在接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息之前，接收第一通信节点发送的指示信息，该指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息。相应地，本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输装置200还可以包括：确定模块240，设置为在接收模块220接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息之前，根据对与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息的测量或接收，确定第二通信节点对寻呼信息的接收方式。
在本实施例中，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息的参考信号，例如，寻呼消息的解调参考信号；或者，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息相关的物理控制信道的参考信号，例如，承载寻呼下行控制信息(paging DCI)的下行物理控制信道的解调参考信号。上述其他扫描信号或信道包括以下信号或信道中的一项或多项：同步信号(SS)，物理广播信道(PBCH)的解调参考信号，波束参考信号(BRS)，解调参考信号(DMRS)，移动性参考信号 (MRS)，信道状态指示参考信号(CSI-RS)。上述准共位置关系信息包括：与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息，以及寻呼信息相关信号的端口号或/和资源与其他扫描信号或信道的端口号或/和资源的映射关系。
本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输装置用于执行图7所示实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法，具备相应的功能模块，其实现原理和技术效果类似，此处不再赘述。
图10为本实施例提供的还一种寻呼信息的传输方法的流程图。本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法适用于在新一代无线通信系统中进行寻呼的情况中，该方法可以由寻呼信息的传输装置执行，该寻呼信息的传输装置通过硬件和软件结合的方式来实现，该装置可以集成在第一通信节点的处理器中，供处理器调用使用。如图10所示，本实施例的方法可以包括：
在步骤310中，第一通信节点向第二通信节点发送指示信息，该指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，第一通信节点和第二通信节点配置寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息。
本实施例中，提供第一通信节点向其覆盖范围内的第二通信节点发送寻呼信息的方式，在第一通信节点的覆盖范围内，具有多个小区，每个小区中具有多个第二通信节点。第一通信节点可以通过指示准共位置关系信息的方式，向第二通信节点指示在哪些资源上接收寻呼信息；也可以通过配置准共位置关系信息的方式，向第二通信节点指示在哪些资源上接收寻呼信息，即上述通信节点可以通过共同的协议或所属系统预定义该准共位置关系信息，即第二通信节点可以得知在哪些特定的时域位置上接收第一通信节点向其发送寻呼信息。本实施例中涉及到的第一类通信节点和第二类通信节点的实体和功能在上述实施例中已经详细说明，故在此不再赘述。
在步骤320中，第一通信节点根据准共位置关系信息向第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，该寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息。
在本实施例中，在第一通信节点发送准共位置关系信息之后，或者，上述通信节点均配置了准共位置关系信息之后，即可以在准共位置关系信息对应的资源上向该第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，另外，第二通信节点也可以根据已知的准共位置关系信息确定在哪些资源上接收寻呼信息。在本实施例中，上述寻呼信息包括：寻呼下行控制信息或/和寻呼消息，上述实施例中已经详细说明寻 呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息的内容和作用，故在此不再赘述。
本实施例所提供的寻呼信息的传输方法，通过第一通信节点向第二通信节点发送携带有准共位置关系信息的指示信息，或者通过第一通信节点和第二通信节点中配置相同的准共位置关系信息，第一通信节点根据上述准共位置关系信息向第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，该寻呼信息包括寻呼下行控制信息或/和寻呼消息；本实施例提供的技术方案中，通过使得第一通信节点和第二通信节点获知寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息，并且基于该的准共位置关系信息发送寻呼信息，以保证第二通信节点可以有效的接收到寻呼信息，从而解决了将相关LTE系统中通过DRX机制接收寻呼信息的方式应用于新一代无线通信系统中，则需要在每个波束对应的传输子帧或时隙内加载寻呼信息，并且由于IDLE状态的UE无法预知波束或端口在不同时隙的调度情况，而导致通过DRX机制传输寻呼信息的方式非常复杂，难以实现的问题。
在一实施例中，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息的参考信号，例如，寻呼消息的解调参考信号；或者，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息相关的物理控制信道的参考信号，例如，承载寻呼下行控制信息(paging DCI)的下行物理控制信道的解调参考信号。上述其他扫描信号或信道包括以下信号或信道中的一项或多项：同步信号(SS)，物理广播信道(PBCH)的解调参考信号，波束参考信号(BRS)，解调参考信号(DMRS)，移动性参考信号(MRS)，信道状态指示参考信号(CSI-RS)。上述准共位置关系信息包括：与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息，以及寻呼信息相关信号的端口号或/和资源与其他扫描信号或信道的端口号或/和资源的映射关系。
图11为本实施例提供的还一种寻呼信息的传输装置的结构示意图。本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输装置适用于在新一代无线通信系统中进行寻呼的情况中，该寻呼信息的传输装置通过硬件和软件结合的方式来实现，该装置可以集成在第一通信节点的处理器中，供处理器调用使用。如图11所示，本实施例的寻呼信息的传输装置300可以包括：发送模块310和配置模块320。
其中，发送模块310设置为向第二通信节点发送指示信息，该指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，配置模块320，设置为配置第一通信节点中的寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息。
本实施例中，提供第一通信节点向其覆盖范围内的第二通信节点发送寻呼信息的方式，在第一通信节点的覆盖范围内，具有多个小区，每个小区中具有多个第二通信节点。第一通信节点的发送模块310可以通过指示准共位置关系信息的方式，向第二通信节点指示在哪些资源上接收寻呼信息；也可以通过配置模块320配置准共位置关系信息的方式，向第二通信节点指示在哪些资源上接收寻呼信息，即上述通信节点可以通过共同的协议或所属系统预定义该准共位置关系信息，即第二通信节点可以得知在哪些特定的时域位置上接收第一通信节点向其发送寻呼信息。本实施例中涉及到的第一类通信节点和第二类通信节点的实体和功能在上述实施例中已经详细说明，故在此不再赘述。
发送模块310，还设置为根据准共位置关系信息向第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，该寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息。
在本实施例中，在发送模块310发送准共位置关系信息之后，或者，配置模块320配置了准共位置关系信息之后，即可以在准共位置关系信息对应的资源上向该第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，另外，第二通信节点也可以根据已知的准共位置关系信息确定在哪些资源上接收寻呼信息。在本实施例中，寻呼信息包括：寻呼下行控制信息或/和寻呼消息，上述实施例中已经详细说明寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息的内容和作用，故在此不再赘述。
本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输装置用于执行图10所示实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法，具备相应的功能模块，其实现原理和技术效果类似，此处不再赘述。
在一实施例中，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息的参考信号，例如，寻呼消息的解调参考信号；或者，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息相关的物理控制信道的参考信号，例如，承载寻呼下行控制信息(paging DCI)的下行物理控制信道的解调参考信号。上述其他扫描信号或信道包括以下信号或信道中的一项或多项：同步信号(SS)，物理广播信道(PBCH)的解调参考信号，波束参考信号(BRS)，解调参考信号(DMRS)，移动性参考信号(MRS)，信道状态指示参考信号(CSI-RS)。上述准共位置关系信息包括：与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息，以及寻呼信息相关信号的端口号或/和资源与其他扫描信号或信道的端口号或/和资源的映射关系。
图12为本实施例提供的还一种寻呼信息的传输方法的流程图。本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法适用于在新一代无线通信系统中进行寻呼的情况中， 该方法可以由寻呼信息的传输装置执行，该寻呼信息的传输装置通过硬件和软件结合的方式来实现，该装置可以集成在第二通信节点的处理器中，供处理器调用使用。如图12所示，本实施例的方法可以包括：
在步骤410中，第二通信节点接收第一通信节点发送指示信息，该指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，第二通信节点和第一通信节点配置寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息。
本实施例中，提供第一通信节点向其覆盖范围内的第二通信节点发送寻呼信息的方式，在第一通信节点的覆盖范围内，具有多个小区，每个小区中具有多个第二通信节点。第二通信节点可以通过接收第一通信节点发送的准共位置关系信息的方式，确认在哪些资源上接收寻呼信息；也可以通过配置准共位置关系信息的方式，确认在哪些资源上接收寻呼信息，即上述通信节点可以通过共同的协议或所属系统预定义该准共位置关系信息，即第二通信节点可以得知在哪些特定的时域位置上接收第一通信节点向其发送寻呼信息。本实施例中涉及到的第一类通信节点和第二类通信节点的实体和功能在上述实施例中已经详细说明，故在此不再赘述。
在步骤420中，第二通信节点根据准共位置关系信息接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，该寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息。
在本实施例中，在第二通信节点接收准共位置关系信息之后，或者，上述通信节点均配置了准共位置关系信息之后，即可以在准共位置关系信息对应的资源上接收第一通信节点向其发送的寻呼信息，另外，第一通信节点也可以根据已知的准共位置关系信息确定在哪些资源上发送寻呼信息。在本实施例中，上述寻呼信息包括：寻呼下行控制信息或/和寻呼消息，上述实施例中已经详细说明寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息的内容和作用，故在此不再赘述。
本实施例所提供的寻呼信息的传输方法，通过第二通信节点接收第一通信节点发送的携带有准共位置关系信息的指示信息，或者通过第一通信节点和第二通信节点中配置相同的准共位置关系信息，第二通信节点根据上述准共位置关系信息接收第一通信节点向其发送的寻呼信息，该寻呼信息包括寻呼下行控制信息或/和寻呼消息；本实施例提供的技术方案中，通过使得第一通信节点和第二通信节点获知寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关 系信息，并且基于该的准共位置关系信息发送寻呼信息，以保证第二通信节点可以有效的接收到寻呼信息，从而解决了将相关LTE系统中通过DRX机制接收寻呼信息的方式应用于新一代无线通信系统中，则需要在每个波束对应的传输子帧或时隙内加载寻呼信息，并且由于IDLE状态的UE无法预知波束或端口在不同时隙的调度情况，而导致通过DRX机制传输寻呼信息的方式非常复杂，难以实现的问题。
在一实施例中，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息的参考信号，例如，寻呼消息的解调参考信号；或者，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息相关的物理控制信道的参考信号，例如，承载寻呼下行控制信息(paging DCI)的下行物理控制信道的解调参考信号。上述其他扫描信号或信道包括以下信号或信道中的一项或多项：同步信号(SS)，物理广播信道(PBCH)的解调参考信号，波束参考信号(BRS)，解调参考信号(DMRS)，移动性参考信号(MRS)，信道状态指示参考信号(CSI-RS)。上述准共位置关系信息包括：与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息，以及寻呼信息相关信号的端口号或/和资源与其他扫描信号或信道的端口号或/和资源的映射关系。
在一实施例中，步骤420之前还可以包括：
在步骤411中，第二通信节点根据对与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息的测量或接收，确定该第二通信节点对寻呼信息的接收方式。
图13为本实施例提供的还一种寻呼信息的传输装置的结构示意图。本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输装置适用于在新一代无线通信系统中进行寻呼的情况中，该寻呼信息的传输装置通过硬件和软件结合的方式来实现，该装置可以集成在第二通信节点的处理器中，供处理器调用使用。如图13所示，本实施例的寻呼信息的传输装置400可以包括：接收模块410和配置模块420。
其中，接收模块410，设置为接收第一通信节点发送指示信息，该指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，配置模块420，设置为配置第二通信节点中的寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息。
本实施例中，提供第一通信节点向其覆盖范围内的第二通信节点发送寻呼信息的方式，在第一通信节点的覆盖范围内，具有多个小区，每个小区中具有多个第二通信节点。第二通信节点的接收模块410可以通过接收准共位置关系 信息的方式，确认在哪些资源上接收寻呼信息；也可以通过配置模块420配置准共位置关系信息的方式，确认在哪些资源上接收寻呼信息，即上述通信节点可以通过共同的协议或所属系统预定义该准共位置关系信息，即第二通信节点可以得知在哪些特定的时域位置上接收第一通信节点向其发送寻呼信息。本实施例中涉及到的第一类通信节点和第二类通信节点的实体和功能在上述实施例中已经详细说明，故在此不再赘述。
接收模块410，还设置为根据准共位置关系信息接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，该寻呼信息包括以下一项或多项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息。
在本实施例中，在接收模块410接收准共位置关系信息之后，或者，配置模块420配置了准共位置关系信息之后，即可以在准共位置关系信息对应的资源上接收第一通信节点向其发送的寻呼信息，另外，第一通信节点也可以根据已知的准共位置关系信息确定在哪些资源上发送寻呼信息。在本实施例中，上述寻呼信息包括：寻呼下行控制信息或/和寻呼消息，上述实施例中已经详细说明寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息的内容和作用，故在此不再赘述。
本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输装置用于执行图12所示实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法，具备相应的功能模块，其实现原理和技术效果类似，此处不再赘述。
在一实施例中，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息的参考信号，例如，寻呼消息的解调参考信号；或者，上述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调寻呼信息相关的物理控制信道的参考信号，例如，承载寻呼下行控制信息(paging DCI)的下行物理控制信道的解调参考信号。上述其他扫描信号或信道包括以下信号或信道中的一项或多项：同步信号(SS)，物理广播信道(PBCH)的解调参考信号，波束参考信号(BRS)，解调参考信号(DMRS)，移动性参考信号(MRS)，信道状态指示参考信号(CSI-RS)。上述准共位置关系信息包括：与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息，以及寻呼信息相关信号的端口号或/和资源与其他扫描信号或信道的端口号或/和资源的映射关系。
在一实施例中，寻呼信息的传输装置400还可以包括：
确定模块430，设置为在接收模块410接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息之前，根据对与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息的测量或接收，确定第二通信节点对寻呼信息的接收方式。
图14为本实施例提供一种寻呼信息的传输系统的结构示意图，该寻呼信息的传输系统包括第一通信节点10和至少一个第二通信节点20。
在一实施例中，第一通信节点10中配置有如上述图4和图5所示任一实施例中的寻呼信息的传输装置100，每个第二通信节点20中配置有如上述图8和图9所示任一实施例中的寻呼信息的传输装置200。图14所示实施例以寻呼信息的传输系统中包括三个第二通信节点20为例予以示出，该寻呼信息的传输系统中的每个网元执行寻呼信息的传输的方式，与上述图4、图5、图8和9所示实施例中对应网元执行寻呼信息的传输的方式相同，同样用于执行本实施例中图1到图3，图6和图7所示任一实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法，具备相应的实体装置，其实现原理和技术效果类似，此处不再赘述。
在一实施例中，第一通信节点10中配置有如上述图11所示任一实施例中的寻呼信息的传输装置300，每个第二通信节点20中配置有如上述图13所示任一实施例中的寻呼信息的传输装置400。图14所示实施例以寻呼信息的传输系统中包括三个第二通信节点20为例予以示出，该寻呼信息的传输系统中的每个网元执行寻呼信息的传输的方式，与上述图11和图13所示实施例中对应网元执行寻呼信息的传输的方式相同，同样用于执行本实施例中图10和图12所示任一实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法，具备相应的实体装置，其实现原理和技术效果类似，此处不再赘述。
由于本实施例中涉及到的PO确定参数的内容较多，以下对上述实施例中未详细说明的PO确定参数，作以说明，其中：
1、第二通信节点的非连续接收周期T DRX：如图15所示，为本实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法中一种T DRX的示意图，该T DRX为第二通信节点的非连续接收周期，也是第二通信节点监听寻呼信息的时间间隔。该周期可以是网络侧配置的数值(例如通过系统广播消息或其他RRC信令下发给第二通信节点)，也可以是第二通信节点根据需求设置的，如果是第二通信节点设置，则需要将设置的周期值反馈给网络侧的第一通信节点，并作为双方计算PO的输入参数。图15所示为T DRX周期设置为32，即32个无线帧(radio frames)，长度为320ms，PO所对应的起点无线帧号SFN mod T DRX＝0的情况。这个第二通信节点将每隔320ms唤醒并监听是否有属于自己的寻呼信息。
2、第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔T paging：第一通信节点发送寻呼信息的时 间间隔；图15中所示为T paging＝2，即20ms的情况，即第一通信节点在每个20ms内进行一次寻呼信息的传输，每次寻呼信息的传输指在一组寻呼资源上重复发送寻呼信息，这一组寻呼资源对应于所有端口，完成寻呼信息的全覆盖。这一组寻呼资源可以是与图2中同步信号窗组(SS burst set)资源相对应，即与SS复用在每一个同步信号块(SS block)内，或者预设一组扫描资源。
3、第二通信节点标识Device_ID：第二类通信节点的标识，这里以UE标识(UE_ID)为例进行描述，这个UE标识可以是国际移动用户识别码(International Mobile Subscriber Identity，IMSI)的全部或部分字段，来全网或全区域内唯一的标识一个UE。其他的标识也不限制。
4、准共位置QCL：类似相关LTE中quasi co-located，当两个信道或信号间是准共位置关系时，其中一个资源的信道或信号相关的大尺度信息可以由另一个信道或信号相关的大尺度信息推算得到。
将该准共位置关系信息应用到本实施例中，第一类通信节点向第二类通信节点发送包括准共位置关系信息的指示，例如，为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道的准共位置关系信息，或者，系统预定义寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道的准共位置关系信息。其中准共位置关系信息包括：与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息，以及寻呼信息相关信号的端口号或/和资源与其他扫描信号或信道的端口号或/和资源的映射关系。从而，第二类通信节点在接收寻呼信息相关信号之前，可以通过对与寻呼信息相关信号具有准共位置关系的信号或信道的测量或接收，确定寻呼信息相关信号的接收方式。该接收方式指接收寻呼信息的资源，及接收波束或端口，即第二类通信节点利用哪个接收天线端口在寻呼信息相关信号对应的寻呼时机(一组寻呼资源)的哪一个资源上接收寻呼信息相关信号。
上面所述的准共位置关系信息可以是第一类通信节点通过广播消息发送给所有第二类通信节点的，或者通过与第二类通信节点之间的无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)专用信令发送给第二类通信节点的。上述其他扫描信号或信道包括以下信号或信道中的一项或多项：同步信号(SS)，物理广播信道(PBCH)的解调参考信号，波束参考信号(BRS)，解调参考信号(DMRS)，移动性参考信号MRS)，信道状态指示参考信号(CSI-RS)。
在本实施例中，同步信号以图2所示的同步信号窗组(SS burst set)扫描资源来承载，SS在每一个SS block内以特定的端口/端口组发送，可以定义SS与 寻呼信息相关信号的准共位置关系，则在一一SS block内接收SS的信道信息可以用于接收与这个block相对应的寻呼资源上的寻呼信息。SS burst set内潜在还包含PBCH，相应的，PBCH的解调参考信号也可以用来定义与寻呼相关信号的准共位置关系；类似地，BRS为与不同波束/端口相对应的参考信号；MRS为第二通信节点移动性测量所对应的参考信号，用于判断是否发生了波束/TRP/小区的重选或切换；CSI-RS用于终端测量不同端口/波束方向的信道状态。这些信号或信道也可以被配置与寻呼信息相关信号的准共位置关系。
以下通过一些实施示例对上述实施例提供的寻呼信息的传输方法的实际应用进行说明。
实施示例1：
本实施示例描述了一种利用终端标识计算PO的方法，且并没有引入PO偏移量t offset来调整PO，涉及参数为：T DRX＝32，即32个无线帧长，长度为320ms，如图16所示，为本实施示例1提供的一种T DRX与T paging的关系示意图，图16中的T paging＝2，即大于无线帧长10ms，且T DRX与T paging间存在倍数关系(即T DRX是T paging整数倍)，根据T SS的不同取值，以及SS burst set起点无线帧的位置，分为如下子实施示例进行详细描述：
子实施示例1-1：
如图17所示，为本子实施示例1-1提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图，在子实施示例1-1中，T SS＝T paging＝2，即2个无线帧(radio frames)的长度，SS burst set的起点无线帧号SFN满足SFN mod 2＝0；此时，SS burst set与PO在周期和时域起点上完全重合，寻呼信息的传输完全可以复用在SS burst set内。
基站确定要向UE_ID为0000001101的终端发送寻呼信息，基站首先计算属于该终端的PO的起点无线帧号。利用如下公式确定起点无线帧号：
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(UE_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))；
将参数取值带入公式，得到：
SFN mod 32＝2*(13mod(32/2))＝26；
则该终端的PO的起点无线帧号满足：SFN mod 32＝26。
基站在满足上述公式的无线帧作为起点，在该无线帧对应的SS burst set内向该终端发送寻呼信息。例如，发送寻呼信息的资源，与SS burst set的扫描资源相关，如图18所示，为图17所示子实施示例1-1中的终端的PO的结构示意 图，该终端的PO包含两个SS burst，分别占用无线帧26、27的第一个子帧，即子帧0。每个SS burst内包含m个SS block，基站将在每一个SS block内以各自特定的端口或波束向终端发送相同的寻呼信息。寻呼信息在每一个SS block内与同步信号及其他信号复用，复用方式可以是TDM或FDM这里并不做规范。
与基站侧相对应的，终端以相同的公式计算自身的PO，并在每一次PO到来时，监测是否有属于自己的寻呼信息。计算PO的确定参数事先由基站配置。相应地，得到PO的起点无线帧号为mod 32＝26的无线帧。根据SS burst set的扫描资源，终端获知需要在frame 26、27的sub-frame 0监听寻呼信息。当终端不知道哪个下行发射端口与自己相对应时，终端需要在每个个SS block内尝试接收寻呼信息，甚至，如果终端也不知道优选下行接收端口时，终端还需以不同的接收端口尝试接收寻呼信息，即利用一接收端口尝试接收整个PO内的所有SS block，并在下一次PO到来时切换接收端口，以此类推，通过多个PO的监听才能确定是否有属于自己的寻呼。
为了节省上述接收寻呼信息的开销与时延，基站向终端配置了寻呼信息与同步信号间的准共位置关系(QCL relationship)，即寻呼信息与同步信号是准共位置的，且寻呼资源与同步信号传输资源间给定了映射关系。例如，用SS block索引表示同步信号传输资源，相应的，寻呼资源由paging block(可能复用SS block)的索引来表示。
终端在PO到来前，提前从休眠状态唤醒，并对基站发射的与寻呼信息存在QCL关系的扫描信号信道进行测量或接收。以同步信号为例，终端利用不同的接收天线端口依次接收基站通过不同发射天线端口发送的同步信号，终端将获得多组测量结果，每组结果对应于自身的一个接收天线端口及一个基站侧的发射天线端口，把多组测量结果中信号强度最强的那一组所对应的自身的接收天线端口作为后续接收寻呼消息所采用的天线端口。
当PO到来时，终端可以以这个事先确定的特定接收天线端口来接收基站发送的寻呼信息。本子实施示例中，终端通过训练得到优选的下行接收天线端口为接收天线端口4，当寻呼时机到来时，终端将只以接收天线端口4进行寻呼消息的接收，不再在不同的寻呼时机切换接收天线端口。
在终端下行接收天线端口训练过程中，它同时可以识别出基站侧下行优选发射天线端口/优选发射波束方向，即多组测量结果中信号强度最强的那一组所对应的基站侧的发射天线端口。如果系统事先预定义了该发射天线端口的时频 域资源位置(如SS block索引为3)与对应发射天线端口的寻呼资源(即PO中的一个的寻呼资源，如paging block(当与SS复用资源时，为SS block)索引为3)间的映射关系，则终端在寻呼时机到来时，终端可以减少接收寻呼的次数，即只在下行优选发射天线端口对应的同步信号块SS block内接收寻呼。
本子实施示例中，训练得到相对于这个终端，基站的优选下行发射天线端口(对应寻呼资源为SS block 3)，终端的优选下行接收天线端口为端口4，当PO到来时，终端将只以接收天线端口4在SS block 3中接收寻呼。
与寻呼存在准共位置关系的信号或信道还可以是以下之一：物理广播信道(PBCH)的解调参考信号(DMRS)，波束参考信号(BRS)，移动性参考信号(MRS)，信道状态指示参考信号(CSI-RS)。终端利用准共位置关系指示信息，确定PO内寻呼资源的方式与本实施示例相同。
子实施示例1-2：
如图19所示，为本子实施示例1-2提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图，在子实施示例1-2中，T SS＝T paging＝2，即2个无线帧(radio frames)的长度，SS burst set的起点无线帧号SFN满足SFN mod 2＝1；此时，SS burst set与PO在周期和时域起点上完全不重合，寻呼信息的传输不会复用在SS burst set内。
与子实施示例1-1相同的，基站确定要向UE_ID为0000001101的终端发送寻呼信息，基站首先计算属于该终端的PO的起点无线帧号。利用如下公式确定起点无线帧号：
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(UE_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))；
将参数取值带入公式，得到：
SFN mod 32＝2*(13mod(32/2))＝26；
则该终端的PO的起点无线帧号满足：SFN mod 32＝26。
与子实施示例1-1的区别在于，此时，PO的起点无线帧与SS burst set起点无线帧并不相同。因此，寻呼信息并不与同步信号复用在SS burst set内，而是独立形成一个扫描资源，例如为paging burst set。子实施示例1-2的其他技术特征均与子实施示例1-1的相同，这里不再赘述。
子实施示例1-3：
如图20所示，为本子实施示例1-3提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图， 在子实施示例1-3中，T paging＝2*T SS＝2，即T SS＝1，由于SS burst set的周期为一个无线帧长，因此，每个无线帧均是一个SS burst set的起点无线帧；但是PO的起点无线帧是SS burst set的子集；此时，寻呼信息的传输可以复用在部分SS burst set内，也就是说有一部分SS burst set内不复用寻呼信息，另一部分SS burst set内复用寻呼信息。
与子实施示例1-1相同的，基站确定要向UE_ID为0000001101的终端发送寻呼信息，基站首先计算属于该终端的PO的起点无线帧号。利用如下公式确定起点无线帧号：
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(UE_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))；
将参数取值带入公式，得到：
SFN mod 32＝2*(13mod(32/2))＝26；
则该终端的PO的起点无线帧号满足：SFN mod 32＝26。
与子实施示例1-1的区别在于，此时，PO的起点无线帧frame26所对应的SS burst set扫描资源不同，如图21所示，为图20所示子实施示例1-3中的终端的PO的结构示意图，图21中的SS burst set指包含一个无线帧的时域长度，包含一个SS burst，该SS burst映射在子帧0上。终端在计算出PO的起点无线帧号后，将在frame 26的sub-frame 0内监测寻呼信息。
子实施示例1-4：
如图22所示，为本子实施示例1-4提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图，在子实施示例1-4中，T paging＝0.5*T SS＝2，即T SS＝4，即SS burst set的周期为四个无线帧长，SS burst set的起点无线帧号满足SFN mod 4＝1；此时，部分寻呼信息的传输可以复用在SS burst set内，也就是说，所有的SS burst set内都复用寻呼信息，另外，还存在一部分寻呼信息的传输需要新增另外的扫描资源。
与子实施示例1-1相同的，基站确定要向UE_ID为0000001101的UE1发送寻呼信息，基站首先计算属于该UE1的PO的起点无线帧号。利用如下公式确定起点无线帧号：
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(UE_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))；
将参数取值带入公式，得到：
SFN mod 32＝2*(13mod(32/2))＝26；
则该UE1的PO的起点无线帧号满足：SFN mod 32＝26。
此时，UE1的PO的起点无线帧为frame26，并不与SS burst set起点无线帧重合，因此，在这个PO内新增一组扫描资源。
另外，基站确定要向UE_ID为0000001110的UE2发送寻呼信息，基站计算属于该UE2的PO的起点无线帧号。利用如下公式确定起点无线帧号：
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(UE_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))；
将参数取值带入公式，得到：
SFN mod 32＝2*(14mod(32/2))＝28；
则该UE2的寻呼时机起点无线帧号满足：SFN mod 32＝28。
此时，UE2的PO的起点无线帧为frame28，与SS burst set起点无线帧重合，因此，在这个PO可以复用SS burst set资源发送。但这个PO的持续时间与SS burst set相同，即4个无线帧。即如图23所示，为图22所示子实施示例1-4中的终端的一种PO的结构示意图，虽然T paging＝2，但每个PO的持续时间为40ms，一部分PO burst set与SS burst set时域资源完全匹配(例如PO burst set0、PO burst set2等起点无线帧与SS burst set起点无线帧相同的PO burst set)，对于这些PO可以复用SS burst set资源，另一部分PO burst set与SS burst set时域资源不匹配(例如PO burst set1、PO burst set3等)，对于这些PO不能复用SS burst set资源。另外，这样的配置下，相邻两个PO burst set时域持续时间存在交叠。
虽然相邻两个PO burst set时域持续时间存在交叠，但不同PO burst set占用的时域资源并不相同，例如PO burst set0与PO burst set1均占用无线帧2、3，但两者占用的子帧资源可以不同。
在子实施示例1-4的另一种实现方式中，也可以不复用SS burst set资源，如图24所示，为图22所示子实施示例1-4中的终端的另一种PO的结构示意图，独立配置周期为20ms的PO burst set，此时，相邻的PO burst set时域范围不存在交叠。
在一实施例中，本实施示例1中的每个子实施示例中计算PO的起点无线帧号的公式也可以为：SFN mod T DRX＝(T DRX/N)*(Device_ID mod N)，与公式SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(UE_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))的区别在于，基站配置的寻呼时机确定参数中不包括寻呼间隔T paging，而是T DRX内发送寻呼信息的次数N，则当T DRX与T paging间存在倍数关系时，N＝T DRX/T paging。因此，两公式的作用是等效的，区别只在于网络侧配置的参数不同。
实施示例2：
在实施示例1的每个子实施示例中，T DRX与T paging间存在倍数关系(即T DRX是T paging整数倍)，且T paging大于或等于无线帧长。当T DRX与T paging间不存在倍数关系，且T paging大于或等于无线帧长时，基站和终端可以通过如下公式计算PO的起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000049
如图25所示，为本实施示例2提供的一种T paging与T DRX的关系示意图，其中，T DRX＝32，T paging＝10，则每个DRX周期内存在3个PO，通过UE_ID将多个终端分散到3个PO内，此时，无线帧31、32内将不会存在寻呼资源。
基站确定要向UE_ID为0000001101的终端发送寻呼信息，基站首先计算属于该终端的PO的起点无线帧号。利用如下公式确定起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000050
将参数取值带入公式，得到：
SFN mod 32＝10*(13mod(32/10))＝10；
则该终端的PO的起点无线帧号满足：SFN mod 32＝10。即DRX周期内的第二个PO。
在本实施示例的另一种可能的实现方式中，计算寻呼时机起点无线帧号的公式也可以是：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000051
与公式
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000052
的区别在于，基站配置的PO确定参数中不包括寻呼间隔T paging，而是TDRX内发送寻呼信息的次数N，则当T DRX与T paging间不存在倍数关系时，
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000053
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000054
例如，基站向终端配置N＝3，则
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000055
因此，两公式的作用是等效的，区别只在于网络侧配置的参数不同。
实施示例3：
在实施示例1的每个子实施示例中，T DRX与T paging间存在倍数关系(即T DRX是T paging整数倍)，且T paging大于或等于无线帧长。当T DRX与T paging间存在倍数关系，且T paging小于无线帧长时，基站和终端可以通过如下公式计算PO的起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000056
如图26所示，为本实施示例3提供的一种T paging与T DRX的关系示意图，其中，T DRX＝32，T paging＝0.5，即基站发送寻呼信息的间隔为5ms，此时，每个无线帧将对应与两个PO，则在确定起点无线帧号后，还需确定终端的PO是在前半帧还是后半帧，即起点子帧位置。
基站确定要向UE_ID为0000001101的终端发送寻呼信息，基站首先计算属于该终端的PO的起点无线帧号。利用如下公式确定起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000057
将参数取值带入公式，得到：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000058
则该终端的PO的起点无线帧号满足：SFN mod 32＝6。即DRX周期内的第二个PO。
根据UE_ID确定这个终端的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置。在实际应用中，预定义利用UE_ID的最后一位0和1分别对应子帧0和子帧5，则本实施示例中UE_ID末尾为1，则终端对应的起点子帧为子帧5。即图26的斜线部分为该终端的寻呼时机。基站在frame 6的sub-frame 5对应的寻呼资源上给这个终端发送寻呼信息。终端采用相同的方法计算PO，并接收寻呼信息。
在本实施示例的另一种可能的实现方式中，计算寻呼时机起点无线帧号的公式也可以是：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000059
与公式
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000060
的区别在于，基站配置的PO确定参数中不包括寻呼间隔T paging，而是T DRX内发送寻呼信息的次数N，则当T DRX与T paging间存在倍数关系时，N＝T DRX/T paging。例如，基站向终端配置N＝64，则
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000061
因此，两公式的作用是等效的，区别只在于网络侧配置的参数不同。
实施示例4：
由于T DRX，T paging，N等参数均为可配置参数，为了避免T DRX与T paging间不存在倍数关系，或/和，T paging小于无线帧长的情况出现，基站和终端可以通过如下公式计算PO的起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000062
即公式中同时包括实施示例2和实施示例3中的两个向下取整运算。类似 地，当T paging小于无线帧长时，基站根据预定义的规则确定终端的PO的起点子帧号。相应的，终端也根据预定义的规则确定PO的起点子帧号。
另外，本实施示例中计算寻呼时机起点无线帧号的公式也可以是：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000063
与公式
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000064
的区别在于，基站配置的PO确定参数中不包括寻呼间隔T paging，而是T DRX内发送寻呼信息的次数N，则当T DRX与T paging间不存在倍数关系时，
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000065
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000066
因此，两公式的作用是等效的，区别只在于网络侧配置的参数不同。
实施示例5：
本实施示例描述了一种利用UE_ID计算PO的起始无线帧号，且在计算公式中引入PO偏移量t offset，来调整PO的起点无线帧位置。如实施示例1的子实施示例1-2所述，当PO的起点无线帧与SS burst set起点无线帧不匹配，即存在偏移时，即使两者周期存在约束或倍数关系，寻呼仍然无法有效的复用SS burst set资源，而是需要新增一组新的扫描资源，这样资源利用率不能达到最优。因此，本实施示例中引入t offset。
本实施示例中，T paging大于无线帧长10ms，且T DRX与T paging间存在倍数关系，根据SS burst set的起点无线帧的位置与PO的起点无线帧位置是否匹配，分为如下子实施示例进行详细描述：
子实施示例5-1：
如图27所示，为本子实施示例5-1提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图，在子实施示例5-1中，T DRX＝32，即32个无线帧长，T SS＝T paging＝2，即2个无线帧(radio frames)的长度，SS burst set的起点无线帧号满足SFN mod 2＝0；此时，SS burst set与PO在周期和时域起点上完全重合，寻呼信息的传输完全可以复用在SS burst set内。此时t offset＝0，即不额外引入偏移量。
基站确定要向UE_ID为0000001101的终端发送寻呼信息，基站首先计算属于该终端的PO的起点无线帧号。利用如下公式确定起点无线帧号：
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(UE_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))+t offset；
将参数取值带入公式，得到：
SFN mod 32＝2*(13mod(32/2))＝26；
则该终端的PO的起点无线帧号满足：SFN mod 32＝26。
从而确定了PO的起点无线帧，且可以实现寻呼信息对SS burst set资源的复用。确定PO的起点无线帧后，基站发送寻呼信息，终端以相同的方式计算得到PO的起点无线帧，以及接收寻呼信息的方式与实施示例1的子实施示例1-1的方式相同，故在此不再赘述。
本实施示例中，T SS＝T paging，当T SS与T paging为其他倍数或者约数关系时，如图20和图21所示，只要PO的起点无线帧与SS burst set起点无线帧存在重合，t offset均可以取值为0，即无需调整PO的起点无线帧位置，也可以实现寻呼信息尽可能的复用SS burst set资源。
子实施示例5-2：
如图28所示，为本子实施示例5-2提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图，T DRX＝32，即32个无线帧长，T SS＝T paging＝2，即2个无线帧(radio frames)的长度，SS burst set的起点无线帧号满足SFN mod 2＝1；此时，SS burst set与PO在周期和时域起点上完全不重合，引入t offset调整PO的起点无线帧位置，从而使寻呼信息的传输复用在SS burst set内。
与子实施示例5-1相同的，基站确定要向UE_ID为0000001101的终端发送寻呼信息，基站首先计算属于该终端的PO的起点无线帧号。利用如下公式确定起点无线帧号：
SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(UE_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))+t offset；
将参数取值带入公式，得到：
SFN mod 32＝2*(13mod(32/2))+1＝27；
则该终端的PO的起点无线帧号满足：SFN mod 32＝27。
图28中frame0、2、4、6等的位置为PO的起点无线帧调整之前的无线帧号，通过t offset的向后偏移，PO的起点无线帧调整到与SS burst set起点无线帧相同(即frame1，3，5，7等)，因此，寻呼信息与同步信号复用在SS burst set内。后续基站发送寻呼信息，及终端接收寻呼信息的方法与实施示例1的子实施示例1-1相同，这里不再赘述。
本子实施示例中，T SS＝T paging，当T SS与T paging是其他倍数或者约数关系时，如图29和图30所示，只要PO的起点无线帧与SS burst set起点无线帧存在偏移，t offset均可以取值为对应偏移量，即通过调整PO的起点无线帧位置，实现寻呼尽可能的复用SS burst set资源；其中，图29为本子实施示例5-2提供的另一 种T paging与T SS的关系示意图，图30为本子实施示例5-2提供的又一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图。
实施示例6：
实施示例5中每个子实施示例中，T DRX与T paging间存在倍数关系，且T paging大于无线帧长。当T DRX与T paging间不存在倍数关系，且T paging大于无线帧长时，基站和终端可以通过如下公式计算PO的起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000067
如图31所示，为本实施示例6提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图，T DRX＝32，T paging＝10，t offset＝4，则每个DRX周期内存在3个PO，通过UE_ID将多个终端分散到3个PO内。
基站确定要向UE_ID为0000001101的终端发送寻呼信息，基站首先计算属于该终端的PO的起点无线帧号。利用如下公式确定起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000068
将参数取值带入公式，得到：
SFN mod 32＝10*(13mod(32/10))+4＝14；
则该终端的PO的起点无线帧号满足：SFN mod 32＝14。即DRX周期内的第二个PO。
在本实施示例的另一种可能的实现方式中，计算寻呼时机起点无线帧号的公式也可以是：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000069
与公式
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000070
的区别在于，基站配置的PO确定参数中不包括寻呼间隔T paging，而是T DRX内发送寻呼信息的次数N，则当T DRX与T paging间不存在倍数关系时，
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000071
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000072
例如，基站向终端配置N＝3，则
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000073
因此，两公式的作用是等效的，区别只在于网络侧配置的参数不同。
实施示例7：
实施示例1中每个子实施示例中，T DRX与T paging间存在倍数关系，且T paging大于无线帧长。当T DRX与T paging间存在倍数关系，且T paging小于无线帧长时，基站和终端可以通过如下公式计算PO的起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000074
如图25所示，T DRX＝32，T paging＝0.5，即寻呼信息的基站侧的发送间隔为5ms，此时，每个无线帧将对应与两个PO，则在确定起点无线帧号后，还需确定终端的PO是在前半帧还是后半帧，即起点子帧号。另外，寻呼起点无线帧与SS burst set起点无线帧重合，t offset配置为0。
基站确定要向UE_ID为0000001101的终端发送寻呼信息，基站首先计算属于该终端的PO的起点无线帧号。利用如下公式确定起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000075
将参数取值带入公式，得到：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000076
则该终端的PO的起点无线帧号满足：SFN mod 32＝6。即DRX周期内的第二个PO。
根据UE_ID来确定这个终端的PO的起点子帧位置。预定义利用UE_ID的最后一位0和1分别对应子帧0和子帧5，则本实施示例中UE_ID末尾为1，则终端对应的起点子帧为子帧5。即图25的斜线部分为该终端的寻呼时机。
基站在frame 6的sub-frame 5对应的寻呼资源上给这个终端发送寻呼信息，终端采用相同的方法计算PO，并接收寻呼信息。
在本实施示例的另一种实现方式中，计算PO的起点无线帧号的公式也可以是：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000077
与公式
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000078
的区别在于，基站配置的PO确定参数中不包括寻呼间隔T paging，而是T DRX内发送寻呼信息的次数N，则当T DRX与T paging间存在倍数关系时，N＝T DRX/T paging。例如，基站向终端配置N＝64，则
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000079
因此，两公式的作用是等效的，区别只在于网络侧配置的参数不同。
另外，t offset可以根据PO的起点无线帧调整前无线帧号与SS burst set起点无线帧间的实际偏移来设置取值，并配置给终端。
实施示例8：
由于T DRX，T paging，N等参数均为可配置参数，为了避免T DRX与T paging间不存在倍数关系，或/和，T paging小于无线帧长的情况出现，基站和终端可以通过如下公式计算PO的起点无线帧号：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000080
即公式中同时包含实施示例6和实施示例7中的两个向下取整运算符。同样的，当T paging小于无线帧长时，基站根据预定义的规则确定终端的PO的起点子帧号。相应的，终端也根据预定义的规则确定PO的起点子帧号。
另外，本实施示例中计算寻呼时机起点无线帧号的公式也可以是：
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000081
与公式
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000082
的区别在于，基站配置的PO确定参数中不包括寻呼间隔T paging，而是T DRX内发送寻呼信息的次数N，则当T DRX与T paging间不存在倍数关系时，
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000083
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000084
因此，两公式的作用是等效的，区别只在于网络侧配置的参数不同。
另外，t offset可以根据PO的起点无线帧调整前无线帧号与SS burst set起点无线帧间的实际偏移来设置取值，并配置给终端。
实施示例9：
本实施示例描述了一种基于基站配置的PO的确定方法，T DRX＝32，即32个无线帧长，如图32所示，为本实施示例9提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图，其中，T SS＝2，即20ms，根据T paging的不同取值，以及是否在SS burst set内复用寻呼信息，分为如下子实施示例进行详细描述：
子实施示例9-1：
在本子实施示例中，T SS＝T paging＝2，T paging为基站发送寻呼信息的周期，在本子实施示例所对应的方法下不需要配置给终端，基站通过为终端配置不同t offset，实现终端在不同PO的分散配置，并且可以复用SS burst set资源。
基站通过如下公式确定起点无线帧号：
SFN mod T DRX＝t offset；
举例来说，在网终端有32个，DRX周期均为32，则在DRX周期内包含16个PO，32个终端被配置到对应的PO内，如下表1的所示：
表1
终端 PO偏移量(t offset) 寻呼时机(PO)
UE0、UE1 0 PO 0
UE2、UE3 2 PO 1
UE4、UE5 4 PO 2
UE6、UE7 6 PO 3
UE8、UE9 8 PO 4
UE10、UE11 10 PO 5
…… …… ……
UE28、UE29 28 PO 14
UE30、UE31 30 PO 15
基站通过单播，或组播的方式向不同UE/UE组配置上表1所示的t offset，每个终端通过偏移量，即SFN mod T DRX＝t offset确定属于自己的PO。其中，单播可以是专用的RRC信令来通知；组播的方式下，对应于一组相同PO位置的终端，基站分配相同的组标识(如G-RNTI，Group RNTI)，并将寻呼时机偏移量利用G-RNTI加扰，终端利用G-RNTI解扰配置信息，则相同组内的终端获得对应的t offset配置。
与前面实施示例所述的方法相同，基站在对应的PO给终端发送寻呼信息，终端在对应的PO接收寻呼信息。
在本实施示例的另一种实现方式中，基于基站的实现，也可以不把所有16个PO都配置给终端，一些没有配置终端的PO，基站可以在没有配置终端的位置不发送寻呼信息。每个PO中配置终端的数量也是可变的，终端分组的原则这里也不做限制。
子实施示例9-2：
基站也可以通过配置t offset，实现寻呼信息与SS burst set完全不复用。如图33所示，为本子实施示例9-2提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图，T SS＝T paging＝2，SS burst set的起点无线帧满足SFN mod 2＝1，而PO的起点无线帧满足SFN mod 2＝0，此时寻呼信息不复用SS burst set资源，而是利用一组新增的扫描资源。
举例来说，在网终端有32个，DRX周期均为32，则在DRX周期内包含16个PO，32个终端被配置到对应的PO内，如下表2的所示：
表2
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000085
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000086
子实施示例9-3：
如图34所示，为本子实施示例9-3提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图，寻呼信息与SS的传输周期不同，但存在倍数或约束关系，例如，T paging＝2*T SS＝2，即T SS＝1，可以将PO的起点无线帧配置为SS burst set起点无线帧的子集，此时，寻呼信息的传输可以复用在部分SS burst set内，也就是说有一部分SS burst set内不复用寻呼信息，另一部分SS burst set内复用寻呼信息，如表3所示，偶数索引的SS burst set内复用了寻呼信息。
表3
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000087
子实施示例9-4：
如图35所示，为本子实施示例9-4提供的一种T paging与T SS的关系示意图，在本子实施示例中，T paging＝0.5*T SS＝2，即T SS＝4，即SS burst set的周期为4个无线帧长，SS burst set起点无线帧号满足SFN mod 4＝0，此时，部分寻呼信息的传输可以复用在SS burst set内，也就是说所有的SS burst set内都复用寻呼信息，另外，还包括一部分寻呼信息的传输需要新增另外的扫描资源。如表4所示配置，PO 0、PO 2、…、PO 14可以复用SS burst set资源，PO 1、PO 3、…、PO 15分别新增一组扫描资源。
表4
Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-000088
实施示例10：
如图36所示，为本实施示例10中的终端的PO的结构示意图，在本实施示例中，同步信号与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系，两者采用相同的扫描资源，终端通过特定的方式已经确定了自身PO的时域位置。本实施示例描述一 种终端根据准共位置关系信息，及对同步信号的测量，确定PO内寻呼资源的方法。
基站向终端配置了寻呼信息相关信号(如寻呼信息相关物理控制信道的解调参考信号)与同步信号间的准共位置关系(QCL relationship)信息，即寻呼DCI的解调参考信号与同步信号是准共位置的，且寻呼资源与同步信号传输资源间给定了映射关系。准共位置(QCL)关系信息可以是基站通过广播消息发送给所有终端的，或者通过与终端间的RRC专用信令发送给终端的。例如，两者资源是一一映射的，用SS block索引表示同步信号传输资源，相应的，由于寻呼信息与SS复用SS block资源，寻呼资源也由SS block的索引来表示。
终端在PO到来前，提前从休眠状态唤醒，并对基站发送的与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的扫描信号或信道进行测量或接收。以同步信号为例，终端利用不同的接收天线端口依次接收基站通过不同发射天线端口发送的同步信号，终端将获得多组测量结果，每组结果对应于自身的一个接收天线端口及一个基站的发射天线端口，把多组测量结果中信号强度最强的那一组所对应的自身的接收天线端口作为后续接收寻呼信息所采用的天线端口。当寻PO来时，终端可以以这个事先确定的特定接收天线端口来接收基站发送的寻呼信息。本实施示例中，例如，终端通过训练得到优选的下行接收天线端口为接收天线端口4，当PO到来时，终端将只以接收天线端口4进行寻呼消息的接收，不再在不同的寻呼时机切换接收天线端口。
在终端下行接收天线端口训练过程中，它同时可以识别出基站侧下行优选发射天线端口/优选发射波束方向，即多组测量结果中信号强度最强的那一组所对应的基站侧的发射天线端口。如果系统事先预定义了该发射天线端口的时频域资源位置(如SS block索引为3)与对应发射天线端口的寻呼资源(即PO中的一个具体的寻呼资源，即SS block 3)间的映射关系，则终端在PO到来时，可以减少接收寻呼信息的次数，即只在下行优选发射天线端口对应的同步信号块SS block内接收寻呼。
本实施示例中，训练得到相对于这个终端，基站的优选下行发射天线端口(对应寻呼资源为SS block 3)，UE的优选下行接收天线端口为端口4，当PO到来时，终端将只以接收天线端口4在SS block 3中接收寻呼。
与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的其它扫描信号或信道还可以是以下一项或多项：物理广播信道(PBCH)的解调参考信号(DMRS)，波束参考 信号(BRS)，移动性参考信号(MRS)，信道状态指示参考信号(CSI-RS)。终端利用准共位置关系信息，确定PO内寻呼资源的方式与本实施示例相同。
实施示例11：
如图37所示，为本实施示例11中的终端的PO的结构示意图，在本实施示例中，同步信号与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系，两者采用不同的扫描资源，终端通过特定的方式已经确定了自身PO的时域位置。本实施示例描述一种终端根据准共位置关系信息，及对同步信号的测量，确定PO内寻呼资源的方法。
基站向终端配置了寻呼信息相关信号(如寻呼消息的解调参考信号)与同步信号间的准共位置关系(QCL relationship)信息，即寻呼消息的解调参考信号与同步信号是准共位置的，且寻呼消息的资源与同步信号传输资源间给定了映射关系。准共位置(QCL)关系信息可以是基站通过广播消息发送给所有终端的，或者通过与终端间的RRC专用信令发送给终端的。例如，两者资源是多对一映射的：两个同步信号资源对应于一个寻呼消息的资源，即paging block 0内的端口与SS block0和1的端口准共位置。仍然利用SS block索引表示同步信号传输资源，相应地，寻呼资消息的源由paging block的索引来表示。
终端在PO到来前，提前从休眠状态唤醒，并对基站发送的与寻呼消息存在准共位置关系的扫描信号信道进行测量或接收。以同步信号为例，终端利用不同的接收天线端口依次接收基站通过不同发射天线端口发送的同步信号，终端将获得多组测量结果，每组结果对应于自身的一个接收天线端口及一个基站侧的发射天线端口，把多组测量结果中信号强度最强的那一组所对应的自身的接收天线端口作为后续接收寻呼消息所采用的天线端口。当PO到来时，终端可以以这个事先确定的特定接收天线端口来接收基站发送的寻呼消息。本实施示例中，例如，终端通过训练得到优选的下行接收天线端口为接收天线端口4，当PO到来时，终端将只以接收天线端口4进行寻呼消息的接收，不再在不同的寻呼时机切换接收天线端口。
在终端下行接收天线端口训练过程中，它同时可以识别出基站侧下行优选发射天线端口/优选发射波束方向，即多组测量结果中信号强度最强的那一组所对应的基站侧的发射天线端口。如果基站指示了该发射天线端口的时频域资源位置(如SS block索引为3)与对应发射天线端口的寻呼资源(即PO中的一个 的寻呼资源，即paging block 1)间的映射关系，则终端在PO到来时，可以减少接收寻呼消息的次数，即只在下行优选发射天线端口对应的paging block 1内接收寻呼消息。
本实施示例中，训练得到相对于这个终端，基站的优选下行发射天线端口(对应寻呼资源为SS block 3)，UE的优选下行接收天线端口为端口4，当PO到来时，终端将只以接收天线端口4在paging block 1中接收寻呼。
与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的其它扫描信号或信道还可以是以下一项或多项：物理广播信道(PBCH)的解调参考信号(DMRS)，波束参考信号(BRS)，移动性参考信号(MRS)，信道状态指示参考信号(CSI-RS)。终端利用准共位置关系信息，确定PO内寻呼资源的方式与本实施示例相同。
实施示例12：
如图38所示，为本实施示例12中的终端的PO的结构示意图，在本实施示例中，同步信号与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系，两者采用不同的扫描资源，终端通过特定的方式已经确定了自身PO的时域位置。本实施示例描述一种终端根据准共位置关系信息，及对同步信号的测量，确定PO内寻呼资源的方法。
基站向终端配置了寻呼信息相关信号与同步信号间的准共位置关系(QCL relationship)信息，即寻呼消息的解调参考信号与同步信号是准共位置的，且寻呼消息的资源与同步信号传输资源间给定了映射关系。准共位置关系信息可以是基站通过广播消息发送给所有终端的，或者通过与终端间的RRC专用信令发送给所述终端的。例如，两者资源是一对多映射的：一个同步信号资源对应于两个寻呼消息的资源，即SS block 0内的端口与paging block0和1的端口近似相同。仍然利用SS block索引表示同步信号传输资源，相应的，寻呼资源由paging block的索引来表示。
终端在PO到来前，提前从休眠状态唤醒，并对基站发送的与寻呼消息存在准共位置关系的扫描信号信道进行测量或接收。以同步信号为例，终端利用不同的接收天线端口依次接收基站通过不同发射天线端口发送的同步信号，终端将获得多组测量结果，每组结果对应于自身的一个接收天线端口及一个基站侧的发射天线端口，把多组测量结果中信号强度最强的那一组所对应的自身的接收天线端口作为后续接收寻呼消息所采用的天线端口。当PO时，终端可以以这 个事先确定的特定接收天线端口来接收基站发送的寻呼消息。本实施示例中，例如，终端通过训练得到优选的下行接收天线端口为接收天线端口4，当PO到来时，终端将只以接收天线端口4进行寻呼消息的接收，不再在不同的寻呼时机切换接收天线端口。
在终端下行接收天线端口训练过程中，它同时可以识别出基站侧下行优选发射天线端口/优选发射波束方向，即多组测量结果中信号强度最强的那一组所对应的基站侧的发射天线端口。如果基站指示了该发射天线端口的时频域资源位置(如SS block索引为1)与对应发射天线端口的寻呼资源(PO中的两个的寻呼资源，即paging block 2和3)间的映射关系，则终端在PO到来时，可以减少接收寻呼消息的次数，即只在下行优选发射天线端口对应的paging block2、3内接收寻呼消息。
本实施示例中，训练得到相对于这个终端，基站的优选下行发射天线端口(对应寻呼资源为SS block 1)，UE的优选下行接收天线端口为端口4，当PO到来时，终端将只以接收天线端口4在paging block 2、3中接收寻呼。
与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的其它扫描信号或信道还可以是以下一项或多项：物理广播信道(PBCH)的解调参考信号(DMRS)，波束参考信号(BRS)，移动性参考信号(MRS)，信道状态指示参考信号(CSI-RS)。终端利用准共位置关系信息，确定PO内寻呼资源的方式与本实施示例相同。
实施示例13：
在实施示例10到实施示例12中，寻呼信息相关信号指寻呼下行控制信息(paging DCI)的解调参考信号，和或，寻呼消息的解调参考信号；当寻呼下行控制信息与寻呼消息分别采用独立的扫描资源时，基站也可以向终端指示寻呼下行控制信息的解调参考信号与寻呼消息的解调参考信号间的准共位置关系。以便于终端可以依据接收的寻呼下行控制信息的资源，及该准共位置关系，确定寻呼消息的资源，并接收该寻呼消息。如图39所示，为本实施示例13中的终端的PO的结构示意图，图39中的PO内包含一组寻呼资源，其中包含每个波束方向上的寻呼下行控制信息(可以与SS复用SS burst set资源，或者独立配置的一组扫描资源)，而寻呼消息独立配置一组扫描资源，图39中给出了寻呼下行控制信息与寻呼消息的准共位置关系为一一对应的资源映射。与实施示例11和实施示例12类似的，也可以配置多对一或一对多的资源映射关系。
实施示例14：
在实施示例10到实施示例13所描述的方法中，基站通过显式的信令通知终端与寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的扫描信号或信道，或者指示寻呼信息相关信号之间(寻呼信息相关物理控制信道的解调参考信号与寻呼信息相关解调参考信号)的准共位置关系，并指示每个寻呼资源与每个所述扫描信道资源间的映射关系(或者每个寻呼信息相关物理控制信道资源与每个寻呼消息资源间的映射关系)，也可以系统预定义上述关系信息，例如，系统预定义寻呼信息相关信号与波束参考信号BRS(或者寻呼信息相关物理控制信道的解调参考信号与寻呼消息解调参考信号)存在准共位置关系，且寻呼信息相关信号的传输资源与同步信号资源间的映射关系(或者每个寻呼信息相关物理控制信道资源与每个寻呼消息资源)也是固定配置的。此时终端可以按照预定义的配置来确定在PO内的接收方式。
本实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，存储有计算机可执行指令，所述计算机可执行指令用于执行上述任意一种方法。
如图40所示，是本实施例提供的一种基站的硬件结构示意图，如图40所示，该基站包括：处理器(processor)4010和存储器(memory)4020；还可以包括通信接口(Communications Interface)4030和总线4040。
其中，处理器4010、存储器4020和通信接口4030可以通过总线4040完成相互间的通信。通信接口4030可以用于信息传输。处理器4010可以调用存储器4020中的逻辑指令，以执行上述实施例的提供的对应方法。
图41是根据本实施例的一种终端设备的硬件结构示意图，如图41所示，该终端设备包括：一个或多个处理器4110和存储器4120。图41中以一个处理器4110为例。
所述终端设备还可以包括：输入装置4130和输出装置4140。
所述终端设备中的处理器4110、存储器4120、输入装置4130和输出装置4140可以通过总线或者其他方式连接，图41中以通过总线连接为例。
输入装置4130可以接收输入的数字或字符信息，输出装置4140可以包括显示屏等显示设备。该终端设备还可以包括通信装置4150，通过通信网络传输信息。处理器4110可以调用存储器4120中的逻辑指令，以执行上述实施例的提供的对应方法。
上述存储器4020和存储器4120均可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区，存储程序区可以存储操作系统和至少一个功能所需的应用程序。存储数据区可以存储根据设备的使用所创建的数据等。此外，存储器可以包括，例如，随机存取存储器的易失性存储器，还可以包括非易失性存储器。例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件或者其他非暂态固态存储器件。
此外，在上述存储器4020和存储器4120中的逻辑指令可以通过软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，该逻辑指令可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。本公开的技术方案可以以计算机软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品可以存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。
存储介质可以是非暂态存储介质，也可以是暂态存储介质。非暂态存储介质可以包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等多种可以存储程序代码的介质。
上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程，是可以通过计算机程序来指示相关的硬件完成的，该程序可存储于一个非暂态计算机可读存储介质中，该程序被执行时，可包括如上述方法的实施例的流程。
上述方法中的全部或部分步骤可以通过程序来指令相关硬件(例如处理器)完成，所述程序可以存储于计算机可读存储介质中，如只读存储器、磁盘或光盘等。在一实施例中，上述实施例的全部或部分步骤也可以使用一个或多个集成电路来实现。相应地，上述实施例中的每个模块或单元可以采用硬件的形式实现，例如通过集成电路来实现其相应功能，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现，例如通过处理器执行存储于存储器中的程序/指令来实现其相应功能。本申请中的实施例不限制于任何特定形式的硬件和软件的结合。
工业实用性
本公开提供的寻呼信息的传输方法、装置及系统，可以解决将LTE系统中通过DRX机制接收寻呼信息的方式应用于新一代无线通信系统中，由于IDLE状态的UE无法预知波束或端口在不同时隙的调度情况，而导致通过DRX机制传输寻呼信息的方式非常复杂，难以实现的问题。

Claims (59)

  1. 一种寻呼信息的传输方法，包括：
    第一通信节点计算第二通信节点的寻呼时机PO的时域位置；
    所述第一通信节点在所述时域位置对应的PO内向所述第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下至少一项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息；
    其中，所述PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，包括：
    所述第一通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号；
    所述第一通信节点根据所述起点无线帧号和所述PO的时长，计算得到所述PO的时域位置。
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，包括：
    所述第一通信节点根据PO确定参数计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置；所述PO确定参数包括以下至少一项：
    所述第二通信节点的非连续接收周期T DRX；
    所述第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔T paging；
    所述第一通信节点在所述非连续接收周期内发送寻呼信息的数量N；
    所述第二通信节点标识Device_ID；
    所述第二通信节点的PO偏移量t offset。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其中，所述第二通信节点的非连续接收周期为所述第二通信节点接收所述寻呼信息的周期，所述第一通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信节点配置所述第二通信节点的非连续接收周期；或者，
    所述第一通信节点接收所述第二通信节点确定并发送的所述第二通信节点的非连续接收周期。
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点的一个寻呼发送间隔对应一个PO，所述第一通信节点在所述时域位置对应的PO内向所述第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，包括：
    所述第一通信节点在所述PO对应的寻呼发送间隔内通过所有波束或端口向所述第二通信节点发送所述寻呼信息。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其中，T paging＝n*T SS，或者，T paging＝(1/n)*T SS；
    其中，T SS为同步信号窗组的周期，n为正整数。
  7. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其中，所述PO偏移量为用于调整所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置的参数。
  8. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，包括：
    所述第一通信节点根据所述第二通信节点标识，计算出所述非连续接收周期内的一组寻呼资源为所述第二通信节点的PO，并且计算出所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点计算出所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号，包括：
    所述第一通信节点通过以下公式之一计算所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号：
    Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-100001
    SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(Device_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))；
    Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-100002
    SFN mod T DRX＝(T DRX/N)*(Device_ID mod N)；
    Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-100003
    SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(Device_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))+t offset；
    Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-100004
    SFN mod T DRX＝(T DRX/N)*(Device_ID mod N)+t offset；
    其中，所述SFN为所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信节点为小区内的所述第二通信节点配置统一的PO偏移量。
  11. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，包括：
    所述第一通信节点为所述第二通信节点配置预设的PO偏移量；
    所述第一通信节点根据所述配置的PO偏移量计算出所述非连续接收周期内的一组寻呼资源为所述第二通信节点的PO，并且计算得到所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点计算得到所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号，包括：
    所述第一通信节点通过以下公式计算所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号：SFN mod T DRX＝t offset；
    其中，所述SFN为所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信节点为小区内的每个第二通信节点配置一个PO偏移量，且所述每个第二通信节点配置的PO偏移量为相同的或不同的，不同的PO偏移量用于将所述第二通信节点配置到不同的PO内。
  14. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其中，当所述第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔小于无线帧长度时，所述第一通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置，包括：
    所述第一通信节点根据所述第二通信节点标识计算所述第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其中，所述无线帧长度为2n毫秒，所述无线帧包含2m个子帧，所述第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔为n毫秒，所述起点子帧位置为所述无线帧中的子帧0或子帧m，所述起点子帧位置通过所述第 二通信节点标识的最后一个比特bit表示。
  17. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点在所述时域位置对应的PO内向所述第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，包括：
    所述第一通信节点在所述起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置对应的PO内向所述第二通信节点发送所述寻呼信息。
  18. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点在所述时域位置对应的PO内向所述第二通信节点发送寻呼信息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信节点将PO确定参数发送给所述第二通信节点；其中，所述PO确定参数包括以下至少一项：
    所述第二通信节点的非连续接收周期T DRX；
    所述第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔T paging；
    所述第一通信节点在所述非连续接收周期内发送寻呼信息的数量N；
    所述第二通信节点标识Device_ID；
    所述第二通信节点的PO偏移量t offset。
  19. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点和所述第二通信节点中预先配置有所述寻呼信息的相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，
    所述第一通信节点在所述时域位置对应的PO内向所述第二通信节点发送寻呼信息之前，所述方法还包括：所述第一通信节点向所述第二通信节点发送指示信息，所述指示信息为所述寻呼信息的相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其中，所述寻呼信息的相关信号为用于解调所述寻呼信息的参考信号；或者，
    所述寻呼信息的相关信号为用于解调所述寻呼信息相关的物理控制信道的参考信号。
  21. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其中，所述其他扫描信号或信道包括以下信号或信道中的至少一项：同步信号SS，物理广播信道PBCH的解调参考信号，波束参考信号BRS，解调参考信号DMRS，移动性参考信号MRS和信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS。
  22. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其中，所述准共位置关系信息包括：所述其他扫描信号或信道中与所述寻呼信息的相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号 或信道的信息，以及所述寻呼信息的相关信号的端口号和资源中的至少之一与所述其他扫描信号或信道的端口号和资源中的至少之一的映射关系。
  23. 一种寻呼消息的传输方法，包括：
    第二通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的寻呼时机PO的时域位置；
    所述第二通信节点在所述时域位置对应的PO内接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下至少一项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息；
    其中，所述PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法，其中，所述第二通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，包括：
    所述第二通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号；
    所述第二通信节点根据所述起点无线帧号和所述PO的时长，计算得到所述PO的时域位置。
  25. 根据权利要求23所述的方法，其中，所述第二通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二通信节点接收所述第一通信节点发送的PO确定参数；
    所述第二通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，包括：
    所述第二通信节点根据所述PO确定参数计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，所述PO确定参数为所述第二通信节点从所述第一通信节点接收的或者为所述第二通信节点中配置的；所述PO确定参数包括以下至少一项：
    所述第二通信节点的非连续接收周期T DRX；
    所述第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔T paging；
    所述第一通信节点在所述非连续接收周期内发送寻呼信息的数量N；
    所述第二通信节点标识Device_ID；
    所述第二通信节点的PO偏移量t offset。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法，其中，所述第二通信节点的非连续接收周期为所述第二通信节点接收所述寻呼信息的周期，所述第二通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二通信节点接收所述第一通信节点配置并发送的所述第二通信节点的非连续接收周期；或者，
    所述第二通信节点配置所述第二通信节点的非连续接收周期。
  27. 根据权利要求25所述的方法，其中，所述第一通信节点的一个寻呼发送间隔对应一个PO，所述第二通信节点接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，包括：
    所述第二通信节点接收所述第一通信节点在所述PO对应的寻呼发送间隔内通过所有波束或端口发送的所述寻呼信息。
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法，其中，T paging＝n*T SS，或者，T paging＝(1/n)*T SS；
    其中，T SS为同步信号窗组的周期，n为正整数。
  29. 根据权利要求25所述的方法，其中，所述PO偏移量为用于调整所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置的参数。
  30. 根据权利要求25所述的方法，其中，所述第二通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，包括：
    所述第二通信节点根据所述第二通信节点标识，计算出所述非连续接收周期内的一组寻呼资源为所述第二通信节点的PO，并且计算得到所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号。
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的方法，其中，所述第二通信节点计算得出所述第二通信节点的PO对应的点无线帧号，包括：
    所述第二通信节点通过以下公式之一计算所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号：
    Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-100005
    SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(Device_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))；
    Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-100006
    SFN mod T DRX＝(T DRX/N)*(Device_ID mod N)；
    Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-100007
    SFN mod T DRX＝T paging*(Device_ID mod(T DRX/T paging))+t offset；
    Figure PCTCN2017120330-appb-100008
    SFN mod T DRX＝(T DRX/N)*(Device_ID mod N)+t offset；
    其中，所述SFN为所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号。
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法，其中，小区内的所述第二通信节点配置有统一的PO偏移量。
  33. 根据权利要求25所述的方法，其中，小区内的所述第二通信节点配置有预设的PO偏移量，所述第二通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的时域位置，包括：
    所述第二通信节点根据所述预设的PO偏移量计算出所述非连续接收周期内的一组寻呼资源为所述第二通信节点的PO，并且计算得到所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号。
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的方法，其中，所述第二通信节点计算得出所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号，包括：
    所述第二通信节点通过以下公式计算所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号：SFN mod T DRX＝t offset；
    其中，所述SFN为所述第二通信节点的PO对应的起点无线帧号。
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的方法，其中，所述小区内的每个第二通信节点配置有一个PO偏移量，且所述每个第二通信节点配置的PO偏移量为相同的或不同的，不同的PO偏移量用于将所述第二通信节点配置到不同的PO内。
  36. 根据权利要求24所述的方法，其中，当所述第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔小于无线帧长度时，所述第二通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置。
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的方法，其中，所述第二通信节点计算所述第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置，包括：
    所述第二通信节点根据所述第二通信节点标识计算所述第二通信节点的PO的起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置。
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的方法，其中，所述无线帧长度为2n毫秒，所 述无线帧包含2m个子帧，所述第一通信节点的寻呼发送间隔为n毫秒，所述起点子帧位置为所述无线帧中的子帧0或子帧m，所述起点子帧位置通过所述第二通信节点标识的最后一个比特bit表示。
  39. 根据权利要求36所述的方法，其中，所述第二通信节点在所述时域位置对应的PO内接收所述第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，包括：
    所述第二通信节点在所述起点无线帧号的起点子帧位置对应的PO内接收所述第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息。
  40. 根据权利要求23所述的方法，其中，所述第二通信节点和所述第一通信节点通信中预先配置有所述寻呼信息的相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，
    所述第二通信节点在所述时域位置对应的PO内接收所述第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息之前，所述方法还包括：所述第二通信节点接收所述第一通信节点发送的指示信息，所述指示信息为所述寻呼信息的相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息。
  41. 根据权利要求40所述的方法，其中，所述寻呼信息的相关信号为用于解调所述寻呼信息的参考信号；或者，
    所述寻呼信息的相关信号为用于解调所述寻呼信息相关的物理控制信道的参考信号。
  42. 根据权利要求40所述的方法，其中，所述其他扫描信号或信道包括以下信号或信道中的至少一项：同步信号SS，物理广播信道PBCH的解调参考信号，波束参考信号BRS，解调参考信号DMRS，移动性参考信号MRS和信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS。
  43. 根据权利要求40所述的方法，其中，所述准共位置关系信息包括：所述其他扫描信号或信道中与所述寻呼信息的相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道的信息，以及所述寻呼信息的相关信号的端口号和资源中的至少之一与所述其他扫描信号或信道的端口号和资源中的至少之一的映射关系。
  44. 根据权利要求43所述的方法，其中，所述第二通信节点在所述时域位置对应的PO内接收所述第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二通信节点根据对所述其他扫描信号或信道中与所述寻呼信息的相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息的测量或接收，确定所述第二通信节点对所述寻呼信息的接收方式。
  45. 一种寻呼信息的传输方法，包括：
    第一通信节点向第二通信节点发送指示信息，所述指示信息为寻呼信息的相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，所述第一通信节点和所述第二通信节点配置所述寻呼信息的相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；
    所述第一通信节点根据所述准共位置关系信息向所述第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下至少一项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息。
  46. 根据权利要求45所述的方法，其中，所述寻呼信息的相关信号为用于解调所述寻呼信息的参考信号；或者，
    所述寻呼信息的相关信号为用于解调所述寻呼信息相关的物理控制信道的参考信号。
  47. 根据权利要求45所述的方法，其中，所述其他扫描信号或信道包括以下信号或信道中的至少一项：同步信号SS，物理广播信道PBCH的解调参考信号，波束参考信号BRS，解调参考信号DMRS，移动性参考信号MRS和信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS。
  48. 根据权利要求45所述的方法，其中，所述准共位置关系信息包括：所述其他扫描信号或信道中与所述寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息，以及所述寻呼信息相关信号的端口号或/和资源与所述其他扫描信号或信道的端口号或/和资源的映射关系。
  49. 一种寻呼信息的传输方法，包括：
    第二通信节点接收第一通信节点发送的指示信息，所述指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，为所述第二通信节点和所述第一通信节点配置的所述寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；
    所述第二通信节点根据所述准共位置关系信息接收所述第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下至少一项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息。
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的方法，其中，所述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调所述寻呼信息额参考信号；或者，
    所述寻呼信息相关信号为用于解调所述寻呼信息相关的物理控制信道的参考信号。
  51. 根据权利要求49所述的方法，其中，所述其他扫描信号或信道包括以 下信号或信道中的至少一项：同步信号SS，物理广播信道PBCH的解调参考信号，波束参考信号BRS，解调参考信号DMRS，移动性参考信号MRS和信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS。
  52. 根据权利要求49所述的方法，其中，所述准共位置关系信息包括：所述其他扫描信号或信道中与所述寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息，以及所述寻呼信息相关信号的端口号和资源中的至少之一与所述其他扫描信号或信道的端口号和资源中的至少之一的映射关系。
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的方法，其中，所述第二通信节点接收所述第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二通信节点根据对所述其他扫描信号或信道中与所述寻呼信息相关信号存在准共位置关系的信号或信道信息的测量或接收，确定所述第二通信节点对所述寻呼信息的接收方式。
  54. 一种寻呼信息的传输装置，设置于第一通信节点中，所述装置包括：
    计算模块，设置为计算第二通信节点的寻呼时机PO的时域位置；
    发送模块，设置为在所述计算模块计算得到的所述时域位置对应的PO内向所述第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下至少一项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息；
    其中，所述PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输。
  55. 一种寻呼消息的传输装置，设置于第二通信节点中，所述装置包括：
    计算模块，设置为计算所述第二通信节点的寻呼时机PO的时域位置；
    接收模块，设置为在所述计算模块计算得到的所述时域位置对应的PO内接收第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下至少一项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息；
    其中，所述PO包括一组寻呼资源，所述一组寻呼资源用于一个或多个预设波束或端口寻呼信息的传输。
  56. 一种寻呼信息的传输装置，设置于第一通信节点中，所述装置包括：发送模块和配置模块；
    所述发送模块，设置为向第二通信节点发送指示信息，所述指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，所述配置模块，设置为配置所述第一通信节点中的所述寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫 描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；
    所述发送模块，还设置为根据所述准共位置关系信息向所述第二通信节点发送寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下至少一项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息。
  57. 一种寻呼信息的传输装置，设置于第二通信节点中，所述装置包括：接收模块和配置模块；
    所述接收模块，设置为接收第一通信节点发送指示信息，所述指示信息为寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；或者，所述配置模块，设置为配置所述第二通信节点中的所述寻呼信息相关信号与其他扫描信号或信道之间的准共位置关系信息；
    所述接收模块，还设置为根据所述准共位置关系信息接收所述第一通信节点发送的寻呼信息，所述寻呼信息包括以下至少一项：寻呼下行控制信息和寻呼消息。
  58. 一种寻呼信息的传输系统，包括：第一通信节点和至少一个第二通信节点；
    其中，所述第一通信节点中配置有如权利要求54所述的寻呼信息的传输装置，每个所述第二通信节点中配置有如权利要求55所述的寻呼信息的传输装置；或者，
    所述第一通信节点中配置有如权利要求56所述的寻呼信息的传输装置，每个所述第二通信节点中配置有如权利要求57所述的寻呼信息的传输装置。
  59. 一种计算机可读存储介质，存储有计算机可执行指令，所述计算机可执行指令用于执行权利要求1-53中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2017/120330 2017-01-05 2017-12-29 寻呼信息的传输方法、装置及系统 WO2018127025A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP17889644.5A EP3567942B1 (en) 2017-01-05 2017-12-29 Paging information transmission and reception
US16/459,922 US11576147B2 (en) 2017-01-05 2019-07-02 Paging information transmission method, apparatus and system
US17/830,919 US11997645B2 (en) 2017-01-05 2022-06-02 Paging information transmission method, apparatus and system

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201710007665.9 2017-01-05
CN201710007665.9A CN108282861B (zh) 2017-01-05 2017-01-05 一种寻呼信息的传输方法、装置及系统

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/459,922 Continuation US11576147B2 (en) 2017-01-05 2019-07-02 Paging information transmission method, apparatus and system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018127025A1 true WO2018127025A1 (zh) 2018-07-12

Family

ID=62789167

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2017/120330 WO2018127025A1 (zh) 2017-01-05 2017-12-29 寻呼信息的传输方法、装置及系统

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (2) US11576147B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP3567942B1 (zh)
CN (3) CN108282861B (zh)
WO (1) WO2018127025A1 (zh)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3834526A4 (en) * 2018-08-09 2021-09-08 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) MULTIPLEXING OF PDCCH AND SS BURST
EP3834502A4 (en) * 2018-09-18 2021-10-20 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SIGNALING IN ENERGY SAVING MODE
EP3920612A4 (en) * 2019-02-19 2022-04-20 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING REFERENCE SIGNALS

Families Citing this family (24)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018151534A1 (ko) * 2017-02-15 2018-08-23 엘지전자 주식회사 페이징을 릴레이하는 방법 및 릴레이 사용자기기, 및 페이징 수신 방법 및 리모트 사용자기기
CN110731055A (zh) * 2017-03-23 2020-01-24 株式会社Ntt都科摩 用户终端以及无线通信方法
WO2018175714A1 (en) 2017-03-23 2018-09-27 Convida Wireless, Llc Beam training and initial access
WO2018172987A1 (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-09-27 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Quasi-colocation of system access and control signals
US10779259B2 (en) 2017-04-03 2020-09-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Quasi co-location of antenna ports used to transmit paging message and synchronization signals
WO2019028849A1 (en) * 2017-08-11 2019-02-14 Mediatek Singapore Pte. Ltd. METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SYNCHRONIZATION / FREQUENCY TRACKING TO RECEIVE PAGING
CN111903165A (zh) * 2018-03-30 2020-11-06 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 信号传输的方法和设备
CN116506945A (zh) 2018-04-05 2023-07-28 松下电器（美国）知识产权公司 用户设备、基站以及在用户设备和基站中执行的方法
CN109076497B (zh) * 2018-07-04 2022-07-01 北京小米移动软件有限公司 传输信息的方法、装置及基站
CN110769489A (zh) * 2018-07-27 2020-02-07 索尼公司 用于无线通信的电子设备和方法、计算机可读存储介质
CN112567818B (zh) * 2018-08-09 2024-04-12 Lg电子株式会社 无线通信系统中用于接收信号的方法和装置
US11706736B2 (en) * 2018-08-09 2023-07-18 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Paging occasion reallocation of incapable user equipment
CN110831152B (zh) * 2018-08-10 2022-05-10 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 重配置寻呼位置的确定方法、装置、终端、介质
CN112740778B (zh) * 2018-09-18 2023-06-20 上海诺基亚贝尔股份有限公司 下行链路小数据传输
CN109644426B (zh) * 2018-09-27 2020-09-22 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 接收信息、发送信息的方法和设备
CN115052342B (zh) * 2018-09-28 2024-06-18 华为技术有限公司 一种寻呼指示信息的传输方法和装置
CN113348707A (zh) * 2019-03-21 2021-09-03 华为技术有限公司 一种寻呼终端设备的方法及装置
WO2020211080A1 (zh) * 2019-04-19 2020-10-22 华为技术有限公司 一种触发随机接入过程的方法以及相关装置
WO2021003596A1 (en) * 2019-07-05 2021-01-14 Zte Corporation Reducing unsuccessful paging
CN114128367A (zh) * 2019-08-01 2022-03-01 瑞典爱立信有限公司 用于虚假寻呼减少的用户设备（ue）分组准则和机制
CN112788746B (zh) * 2019-11-08 2022-09-16 华为技术有限公司 一种寻呼方法和装置
US11637670B2 (en) * 2020-03-10 2023-04-25 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for CSI-RS in RRC_IDLE/inactive state
WO2024016152A1 (zh) * 2022-07-19 2024-01-25 华为技术有限公司 寻呼方法与通信装置
CN117320137B (zh) * 2023-11-29 2024-02-23 上海卫星互联网研究院有限公司 发送方法、接收方法、装置、设备及存储介质

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2015002578A1 (en) * 2013-07-01 2015-01-08 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Method and arrangement for paging and for monitoring paging
CN106170930A (zh) * 2013-05-21 2016-11-30 三星电子株式会社 用于在波束成形无线通信网络中发射/接收寻呼的设备和方法

Family Cites Families (23)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8145243B2 (en) * 2005-11-08 2012-03-27 Intel Corporation Techniques for location management and paging in a communication system
CN101155167A (zh) * 2006-09-25 2008-04-02 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 放置寻呼指示信道的方法
KR101090542B1 (ko) * 2007-04-26 2011-12-08 인터디지탈 테크날러지 코포레이션 Ｌｔｅ 시스템의 ｍｂｍｓ 전용 셀에서의 측정 메카니즘 및 효율적인 페이징 및 브로드캐스팅 방식 구현의 방법 및 장치
EP2156680B1 (en) * 2007-06-19 2019-05-01 Nokia Technologies Oy Method and apparatuses for determining paging occasions
CN102098783B (zh) * 2007-12-03 2012-12-12 华为技术有限公司 确定寻呼时刻的设备
US8208920B2 (en) * 2008-03-28 2012-06-26 Qualcomm Incorporated Reference signal management in mobile systems
KR101169283B1 (ko) * 2008-06-03 2012-08-02 엘지전자 주식회사 광대역 무선 접속 시스템에서 페이징 정보 송수신 방법
KR20100024332A (ko) * 2008-08-25 2010-03-05 엘지전자 주식회사 페이징 정보 송수신 방법
US9839001B2 (en) * 2009-03-23 2017-12-05 Apple Inc. Methods and apparatus for optimizing paging mechanisms and publication of dynamic paging mechanisms
US9603097B2 (en) * 2009-06-29 2017-03-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Device, method, and apparatus for offline discontinuous reception (DRX) processing with online triggers in cellular systems
CN102124804A (zh) * 2009-11-03 2011-07-13 高通股份有限公司 用于cdma 1xrtt和帧异步td-scdma网络中的空闲模式操作下的多模式终端的方法和装置
CN107948952A (zh) * 2010-10-01 2018-04-20 三菱电机株式会社 通信系统
JP6046236B2 (ja) * 2012-04-05 2016-12-14 オプティス セルラー テクノロジー， エルエルシーＯｐｔｉｓ Ｃｅｌｌｕｌａｒ Ｔｅｃｈｎｏｌｏｇｙ， ＬＬＣ ページングコンフィグレーション情報の受信用の促進ウェイクアップ
US9686772B2 (en) * 2012-08-01 2017-06-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and apparatus for coordinated multipoint (CoMP) communications
US9258798B2 (en) * 2012-11-05 2016-02-09 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for paging in communication systems with large number of antennas
KR20150121002A (ko) * 2013-02-21 2015-10-28 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 대규모 mimo를 위한 안테나 포트 간 ｑｃｌ 설정 방법 및 이를 위한 장치
JP6159485B2 (ja) * 2013-08-26 2017-07-05 華為技術有限公司Ｈｕａｗｅｉ Ｔｅｃｈｎｏｌｏｇｉｅｓ Ｃｏ．，Ｌｔｄ． 通信方法、通信装置、及び基地局
CN104394592B (zh) * 2014-11-14 2018-02-16 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Prb资源的分配方法、装置及基站
EP3253130A4 (en) * 2015-03-03 2018-01-17 Kyocera Corporation Base station, wireless terminal, and network device
GB2537181A (en) * 2015-04-10 2016-10-12 Nec Corp Communication system
US10243642B2 (en) * 2016-04-22 2019-03-26 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and base station for receiving system information, and method and user equipment for transmitting system information
US10231208B2 (en) 2016-06-21 2019-03-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. System and method of paging in next generation wireless communication system
EP3536049A1 (en) * 2016-11-02 2019-09-11 IDAC Holdings, Inc. Devices, systems and methods for power efficient beam management in wireless systems

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106170930A (zh) * 2013-05-21 2016-11-30 三星电子株式会社 用于在波束成形无线通信网络中发射/接收寻呼的设备和方法
WO2015002578A1 (en) * 2013-07-01 2015-01-08 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Method and arrangement for paging and for monitoring paging

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Paging reception", 3GPP TSG RAN WG2 MEETING #96, R2-168519, 5 November 2016 (2016-11-05), XP051193072 *

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3834526A4 (en) * 2018-08-09 2021-09-08 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) MULTIPLEXING OF PDCCH AND SS BURST
US11696254B2 (en) 2018-08-09 2023-07-04 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Multiplexing PDCCH paging occasion and SS burst
EP3834502A4 (en) * 2018-09-18 2021-10-20 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SIGNALING IN ENERGY SAVING MODE
US11856518B2 (en) 2018-09-18 2023-12-26 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Apparatus and methods for signaling in power save mode
EP3920612A4 (en) * 2019-02-19 2022-04-20 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING REFERENCE SIGNALS
US11895618B2 (en) 2019-02-19 2024-02-06 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Reference signal receiving and sending method, device, and system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20220295446A1 (en) 2022-09-15
US20190327710A1 (en) 2019-10-24
CN109548144A (zh) 2019-03-29
CN109548144B (zh) 2021-10-08
CN108282861B (zh) 2022-07-22
EP3567942A4 (en) 2019-11-20
CN115209529A (zh) 2022-10-18
EP3567942A1 (en) 2019-11-13
EP3567942B1 (en) 2024-06-26
US11997645B2 (en) 2024-05-28
US11576147B2 (en) 2023-02-07
CN108282861A (zh) 2018-07-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2018127025A1 (zh) 寻呼信息的传输方法、装置及系统
US20220070783A1 (en) Nr paging early indicator
JP7070983B2 (ja) 無線通信システムにおいて制御情報をマッピングするための方法及び装置
US11218353B2 (en) Paging in beamformed wireless communication system
US11601932B2 (en) Information sending and receiving methods and devices
US10944596B2 (en) RRM measurement and channel estimation based on reference signals of coexisting communication systems
EP2472940B1 (en) Method and apparatus for performing channel measurement for cell
US20150181570A1 (en) Network node and a method therein for scheduling a downlink data transmission to a ue, and a ue and a method therein for receiving a downlink data transmission
US9900887B2 (en) Communication control device and method for communicating subframe information with a terminal device
CN114765731A (zh) 由用户设备执行的方法及用户设备
US20240298271A1 (en) POWER HEADROOM REPORTING FOR PUSCH TRANSMISSIONS TOWARDS MULTIPLE TRPs
JP2023537025A (ja) 情報通信方法、情報受信方法、情報設定方法、情報送信方法、リソース設定方法及び機器
TW202301890A (zh) 針對能力降低的設備的功率節省
EP4187940A1 (en) Information transmission method, apparatus and system
CN110463152A (zh) 在混合参数集场景中用于参考信号和数据的不同参数集
JP7161448B2 (ja) 情報送信及び受信方法及びデバイス
US12101737B2 (en) Paging occasion and paging early indication configuration for different types of user equipments
US20230104440A1 (en) Paging occasion and paging early indication configuration for different types of user equipments
TW202332235A (zh) 傳呼早期指示位置決定
JP2018125854A (ja) 情報送信及び受信方法及びデバイス

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17889644

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2017889644

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20190805